1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
165 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
166 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
167 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
178 by the \SpecialChar LyX
183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
185 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
186 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
187 Documentation mailing list:
188 \begin_inset CommandInset href
190 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
202 \begin_inset Newline newline
206 \begin_inset Newline newline
210 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
212 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
216 \begin_inset Note Note
219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
220 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
221 \begin_inset Newline newline
226 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
234 \begin_layout Standard
235 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
236 LatexCommand tableofcontents
243 \begin_layout Chapter
247 \begin_layout Section
248 What is \SpecialChar LyX
252 \begin_layout Standard
254 is a document preparation system.
255 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
256 scripts, publishable books, business
257 letters and proposals,
258 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
262 It is unlike most other
263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
272 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
285 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
288 pt type, left justified, 5
289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
298 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
302 \begin_layout Standard
303 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
308 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
312 \begin_layout Standard
317 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
318 's philosophy: most importantly,
319 the format of all of the manuals.
320 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
321 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
322 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
325 \begin_layout Section
330 \begin_layout Standard
331 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
332 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
334 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
335 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
339 \begin_layout Standard
340 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
341 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
342 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
344 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
345 only a vertical scrollbar.
348 \begin_layout Standard
349 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
350 The first case is large images.
351 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
352 the image and use the option
363 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
366 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
369 \begin_layout Standard
370 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
371 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
379 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
386 \begin_layout Section
390 \begin_layout Standard
391 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
393 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
395 Just select the manual you want to read from the
402 \begin_layout Section
403 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
407 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
414 \begin_layout Standard
415 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
416 can be configured via the menu
418 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
422 \begin_inset Index idx
425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
432 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
434 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
435 packages are available.
436 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
438 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
439 was installed on your system,
440 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
445 \begin_inset space \space{}
448 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
449 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
451 To force \SpecialChar LyX
452 to re-inspect your system use
454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
458 \begin_inset Index idx
461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
462 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
468 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
469 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
472 \begin_layout Section
475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
477 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
484 \begin_layout Standard
485 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
486 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
487 installed but you will not be
489 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
490 or print your documents
494 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
495 Some \SpecialChar LyX
496 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
505 which can produce PDFs and the like.
508 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
510 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
513 every \SpecialChar LyX
514 document can still be output as plain text
515 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
521 \begin_layout Standard
522 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
524 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
528 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
529 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
532 \begin_layout Standard
533 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
535 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
538 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
546 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
547 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
550 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
554 \begin_inset Index idx
557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
558 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
566 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
573 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
577 \begin_layout Chapter
578 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
582 \begin_layout Section
583 Basic File Operations
584 \begin_inset Index idx
587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
596 \begin_layout Standard
601 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
602 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
605 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
643 arg "buffer-new-template"
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
679 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
683 \begin_layout Itemize
685 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
697 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
713 \begin_layout Itemize
715 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
723 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \begin_layout Itemize
757 arg "buffer-write-as"
761 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
765 \begin_layout Itemize
767 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
783 \begin_layout Itemize
797 \begin_layout Itemize
811 \begin_layout Standard
812 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
813 few minor differences.
816 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
827 command lists the available templates.
828 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
829 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
830 and possibly propose text fragments
832 for the document, features
833 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
836 you would otherwise need to
837 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
839 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
843 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
847 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
853 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
855 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
862 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
866 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
874 \begin_layout Standard
875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
907 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
908 to open a file or create a new one, that big
909 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
913 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
917 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
928 \begin_layout Standard
950 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
952 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
955 people work on the same document at the same time.
959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
963 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
968 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
969 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
971 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
973 \begin_inset Flex Emph
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
978 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
979 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
988 \begin_inset Flex Emph
991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1001 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1016 \begin_inset space ~
1021 will reload the document from disk.
1022 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1023 and want to restore it to the last save
1024 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1036 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1037 them as your changes.
1040 \begin_layout Section
1041 Basic Editing Features
1042 \begin_inset Index idx
1045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1054 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1061 \begin_layout Standard
1062 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1063 can perform cut and paste operations
1064 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1065 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1066 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1067 editing features and how to access
1069 We will start with cut and paste.
1072 \begin_layout Standard
1073 As you might expect, the
1077 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1078 various other editing features.
1079 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1083 \begin_layout Itemize
1089 \begin_inset Index idx
1092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1121 \begin_layout Itemize
1127 \begin_inset Index idx
1130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1159 \begin_layout Itemize
1165 \begin_inset Index idx
1168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1193 \begin_layout Itemize
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_layout Itemize
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1213 \begin_layout Itemize
1217 \begin_inset space ~
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_inset Index idx
1230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1239 \begin_inset Index idx
1242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1257 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1267 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1273 \begin_layout Standard
1274 The first three are self-explanatory.
1275 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1276 and other programs using
1297 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1298 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1303 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1304 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1305 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1306 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1307 into individual cells.
1311 \begin_inset space ~
1316 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1317 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1321 \begin_layout Standard
1325 \begin_inset space ~
1330 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1332 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1334 \begin_inset space ~
1341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1347 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1348 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1349 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1355 \begin_inset space \space{}
1358 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1359 text which is often meaningless.)
1362 \begin_layout Standard
1366 \begin_inset space ~
1369 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1388 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1389 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1390 is inserted as one paragraph.
1391 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1395 \begin_inset space ~
1400 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1401 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1407 \begin_inset space ~
1410 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1412 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1416 \begin_inset space ~
1424 \begin_inset space ~
1427 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1430 paste from the primary selection.
1431 This is normally the currently selected text.
1434 \begin_layout Standard
1437 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1439 \begin_inset space ~
1443 \begin_inset space ~
1451 \begin_inset space ~
1455 \begin_inset space ~
1461 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1463 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1467 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1470 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1475 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1478 \begin_inset space ~
1489 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1491 \begin_inset space ~
1495 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1497 \begin_inset space ~
1505 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1519 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1523 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1527 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1531 \begin_inset space ~
1543 arg "word-find-backward"
1546 shortcut) to search backwards
1550 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1551 Even if you close the widget,
1560 arg "word-find-backward"
1563 will search further.
1568 \begin_layout Standard
1570 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1575 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1578 \begin_inset space ~
1583 field and searches the next match.
1589 \begin_inset space ~
1594 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1596 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1598 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1602 \begin_layout Standard
1604 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1605 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1608 \begin_layout Itemize
1611 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1617 \begin_inset space ~
1623 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1626 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1627 If the toggle is set, searching for
1628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1639 will not match the word
1640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1653 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1657 \begin_layout Itemize
1660 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1664 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1668 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1673 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1674 to only find complete words, e.
1675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1679 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1708 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1712 \begin_layout Itemize
1715 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1720 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1723 \begin_layout Itemize
1726 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1731 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1735 \begin_inset space ~
1743 \begin_layout Itemize
1745 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1750 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1751 been reached without asking.
1752 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1753 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1754 so you need to put it back manually.
1757 \begin_layout Standard
1758 \paragraph_spacing single
1760 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1761 The widget also has a
1765 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1766 widget), hiding replace and options.
1771 button brings you back to the full size.
1774 \begin_layout Standard
1775 \paragraph_spacing single
1778 also offers an advanced
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset space ~
1790 feature that is described in section
1791 \begin_inset space ~
1795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1797 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1805 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1806 \begin_inset space \space{}
1810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1818 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1820 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1825 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1832 \begin_layout Standard
1836 arg "inset-select-all"
1839 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1840 When the cursor is inside an inset
1843 arg "inset-select-all"
1846 selects the content of the inset.
1850 arg "inset-select-all"
1853 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1854 then to the whole document.
1858 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1861 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1865 \begin_layout Section
1867 \begin_inset Index idx
1870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1877 \begin_inset Index idx
1880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1887 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1889 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1896 \begin_layout Standard
1897 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1899 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1905 or the toolbar button
1912 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1917 or the toolbar button
1924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1931 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1932 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1935 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1938 \begin_layout Standard
1940 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1941 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1950 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1951 This is a consequence of the 100
1952 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1955 step undo limit mentioned above.
1958 \begin_layout Standard
1967 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1969 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1973 \begin_layout Section
1975 \begin_inset Index idx
1978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1987 \begin_layout Standard
1988 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1991 \begin_layout Enumerate
1996 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 once anywhere in the edit window.
2002 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2006 \begin_layout Enumerate
2011 \begin_layout Itemize
2018 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2021 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2024 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2025 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2027 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2028 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2034 \begin_layout Itemize
2035 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2038 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2045 \begin_layout Enumerate
2046 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2050 \begin_layout Standard
2051 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2052 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2056 \begin_layout Section
2058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2060 name "sec:Navigating"
2065 \begin_inset Index idx
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2079 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2082 \begin_layout Itemize
2087 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2088 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2091 \begin_layout Itemize
2092 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2094 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2096 \begin_inset space ~
2101 or by the toolbar button
2104 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2110 \begin_layout Itemize
2111 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2113 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2116 and use the same menu to return to them.
2117 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2120 \begin_layout Standard
2124 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2129 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2130 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2132 \begin_inset space ~
2137 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2138 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2139 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2140 last editing position.
2143 \begin_layout Standard
2148 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2152 \begin_layout Subsection
2154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2156 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2161 \begin_inset Index idx
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 Navigating ! Outline
2171 \begin_inset Index idx
2174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2183 \begin_layout Standard
2184 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2185 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2186 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2187 \begin_inset space ~
2191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2193 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2197 ), notes, or citations (see section
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2204 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2209 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2213 \begin_layout Standard
2214 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2215 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2216 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2217 dialog and to modify the citation.
2220 \begin_layout Standard
2225 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2226 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2228 Labels and References
2230 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2239 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2242 \begin_layout Standard
2243 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2244 control the display.
2249 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2250 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2255 option keeps it in the current view state.
2256 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2257 \begin_inset space ~
2260 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2261 \begin_inset space ~
2264 3, the subsections of sections
2265 \begin_inset space ~
2268 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2273 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2274 \begin_inset space ~
2278 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2288 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2291 \begin_layout Standard
2298 button refreshes the TOC (
2299 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2301 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2305 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2307 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2311 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2315 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2319 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2323 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2325 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2329 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2331 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2335 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2337 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2341 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2345 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2347 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2351 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2355 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2359 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2363 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2367 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2371 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2375 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2379 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2381 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2385 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2399 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2400 For example, you can move section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset space ~
2408 2.4 or after section
2409 \begin_inset space ~
2414 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2427 (or the corresponding key bindings
2435 ) you can change the level of sections.
2436 You can make section
2437 \begin_inset space ~
2441 \begin_inset space ~
2445 \begin_inset space ~
2451 \begin_layout Standard
2452 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2453 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2456 \begin_layout Subsection
2457 Horizontal Scrolling
2458 \begin_inset Index idx
2461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2462 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2472 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2474 \begin_inset space ~
2477 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2478 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2479 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2483 \begin_layout Standard
2484 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2488 \begin_layout Itemize
2490 is used on a small tablet computer
2493 \begin_layout Itemize
2494 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2506 \begin_inset space ~
2519 \begin_layout Itemize
2520 Math constructs with long command names
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2525 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2527 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2528 window so that table
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2535 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2540 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2542 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2543 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2546 \begin_layout Standard
2547 \begin_inset Float table
2554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2555 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2558 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2560 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2564 Horizontal scrolling test.
2572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2574 \begin_inset Tabular
2575 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2576 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2621 \begin_layout Section
2622 Input/Word Completion
2623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2625 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2630 \begin_inset Index idx
2633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2640 \begin_inset Index idx
2643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2674 \begin_layout Standard
2676 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2678 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2679 is used to propose completions.
2682 \begin_layout Standard
2683 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2686 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2691 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2698 \begin_inset space ~
2702 \begin_inset space ~
2707 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2716 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2717 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2727 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2728 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2729 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2730 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2733 \begin_layout Standard
2735 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2736 completions available.
2741 key to accept a proposed completion.
2742 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2743 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2744 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2747 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2754 \begin_layout Standard
2755 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2756 ing options for text.
2758 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2760 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2762 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2765 he special math option
2769 enables characters to be composed.
2771 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2773 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2777 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2780 you want to insert the character
2781 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2785 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2788 input the characters
2789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2801 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2803 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2807 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2809 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2814 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2816 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2819 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2822 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2824 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2827 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2832 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2834 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2838 's installation folder.
2840 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2841 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2848 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2853 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2854 In the example above,
2859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2891 \begin_layout Section
2893 \begin_inset Index idx
2896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2903 \begin_inset Index idx
2906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2935 \begin_inset Index idx
2938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2984 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2987 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2991 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2992 \begin_inset space ~
2996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2998 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3005 \begin_layout Standard
3009 \begin_inset space ~
3017 \begin_inset space ~
3038 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3042 \begin_layout Labeling
3043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3047 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3048 LatexCommand nomenclature
3050 description "Tabulator key"
3057 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3059 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3060 \begin_inset space ~
3064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3066 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3073 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3077 , especially section
3078 \begin_inset space ~
3082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3084 reference "subsec:Lists"
3090 If you are still confused, look in the
3095 \begin_inset Newline newline
3103 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3104 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3108 \begin_layout Labeling
3109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3113 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3114 LatexCommand nomenclature
3116 description "Escape key"
3124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3131 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3132 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3135 \begin_layout Labeling
3136 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3141 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3142 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3146 \begin_layout Standard
3147 There are three modifier keys:
3150 \begin_layout Labeling
3151 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3169 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3170 LatexCommand nomenclature
3172 description "Control key"
3177 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3178 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3182 \begin_layout Itemize
3191 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3194 \begin_layout Itemize
3203 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3206 \begin_layout Itemize
3215 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3219 \begin_layout Labeling
3220 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3238 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3239 LatexCommand nomenclature
3241 description "Shift key"
3246 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3247 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3250 \begin_layout Labeling
3251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3269 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3270 LatexCommand nomenclature
3272 description "Alt or Meta key"
3277 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3278 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3279 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3285 \begin_inset Newline newline
3288 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3290 menu accelerator keys
3293 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3294 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3298 \begin_layout Standard
3299 For example, the sequence
3300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3306 \begin_inset space ~
3310 \begin_inset space ~
3316 \begin_inset space ~
3324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3343 \begin_inset space ~
3349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3359 \begin_layout Standard
3364 manual lists all other things bound to the
3372 \begin_layout Standard
3373 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3375 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3377 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3378 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3380 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3381 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3382 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3384 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3400 followed by a capital
3407 \begin_layout Chapter
3410 \begin_inset Index idx
3413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 \begin_layout Section
3425 \begin_inset Index idx
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 \begin_layout Subsection
3441 \begin_layout Standard
3442 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3443 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3444 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3445 numbering schemes, and so on.
3446 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3447 and format the title of your document differently.
3450 \begin_layout Standard
3455 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3456 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3457 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3458 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3459 picks one for you by default.
3460 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3463 \begin_layout Subsection
3465 \begin_inset Index idx
3468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3477 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3484 \begin_layout Standard
3485 You can select a class using the
3487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3492 \begin_inset Index idx
3495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3502 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3510 \begin_layout Standard
3511 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3516 \begin_layout Description
3517 Article for basic articles
3520 \begin_layout Description
3521 Report for basic reports
3524 \begin_layout Description
3525 Book for writing a book
3528 \begin_layout Description
3529 Letter for US-style letters
3532 \begin_layout Standard
3533 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3534 only uses if you have installed
3535 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3536 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3537 distributions will include
3539 Here are some of the classes.
3540 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3542 Special Document Classes
3551 \begin_layout Description
3552 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3555 \begin_layout Description
3556 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3560 \begin_layout Description
3561 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3565 \begin_layout Description
3566 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3567 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3568 There are three article layouts available.
3569 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3570 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3571 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3572 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3577 sequential numbering
3578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3581 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3582 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3583 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3584 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3587 \begin_layout Description
3588 Beamer Layout for presentations
3591 \begin_layout Description
3592 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3593 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3594 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3595 with \SpecialChar LyX
3599 \begin_layout Description
3600 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3603 \begin_layout Description
3605 \begin_inset space ~
3608 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3611 \begin_layout Description
3612 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3615 \begin_layout Description
3616 Foils Used to make transparencies
3619 \begin_layout Description
3620 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3621 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3622 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3623 with \SpecialChar LyX
3627 \begin_layout Description
3628 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3629 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3632 \begin_layout Description
3633 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3636 \begin_layout Description
3637 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3640 \begin_layout Description
3641 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3642 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3643 (Is used by this document.)
3646 \begin_layout Description
3647 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3650 \begin_layout Description
3651 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3654 \begin_layout Description
3659 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3660 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3662 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3666 \begin_layout Description
3667 Slides Used to make transparencies
3670 \begin_layout Description
3672 \begin_inset space ~
3675 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3676 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3679 \begin_layout Description
3680 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3683 \begin_layout Standard
3684 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3686 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3688 Special Document Classes
3695 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3696 of the document classes.
3699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3703 \begin_layout Standard
3704 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3706 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3707 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3709 \begin_inset Index idx
3712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3729 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3730 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3732 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3735 \begin_layout Standard
3738 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3743 , are highly specialized.
3745 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3746 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3747 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3748 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3749 by some document class.
3750 There are just too many of them.
3751 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3763 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3764 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3765 document class for a new file.
3767 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3770 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3777 manual for information on how to install them.
3778 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3784 \begin_layout Standard
3785 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3786 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3787 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3788 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3789 class files to be used for dissertation
3790 s submitted to those universities.
3791 The \SpecialChar LyX
3792 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3794 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3798 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3804 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3807 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3811 name "subsec:Modules"
3816 \begin_inset Index idx
3819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3828 \begin_layout Standard
3829 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3830 chosen document class.
3831 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3832 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3839 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3843 \begin_inset Index idx
3846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3853 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3857 \begin_layout Standard
3858 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3859 packages or file format converters that are not always
3860 installed by default.
3862 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3863 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3864 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3865 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3867 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3868 file without the missing prerequisites.
3869 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3870 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3873 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3877 \begin_inset Index idx
3880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3881 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3888 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3892 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3896 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3905 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3907 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3918 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3932 will advise you about these things.
3940 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3944 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3953 Document ! Local Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3963 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3964 : They are intended to be used in
3965 a variety of different documents.
3966 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3967 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3968 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3969 need a specific inset or
3970 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3972 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3975 style only that one time.
3976 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3978 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3996 manual for information on how to use it.
3999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4003 \begin_layout Standard
4004 Each class has a default set of options.
4005 Here's a quick table describing them:
4008 \begin_layout Standard
4009 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4015 \begin_layout Standard
4017 \begin_inset Tabular
4018 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4019 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4021 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4022 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4023 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4024 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4478 \begin_layout Standard
4479 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4485 \begin_layout Standard
4486 You're probably also wondering what
4487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4491 \begin_inset space ~
4495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4499 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4500 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4505 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4510 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4520 headings, there are also
4528 headings, and so on.
4529 We will describe these headings fully in section
4530 \begin_inset space ~
4534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4536 reference "subsec:Headings"
4543 \begin_layout Subsection
4545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4547 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4577 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4584 \begin_inset space ~
4592 \begin_inset space ~
4597 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4599 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4600 doesn't support special options you want to
4601 use for your document.
4602 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4603 -class and its options, you have to read
4607 \begin_layout Standard
4609 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4613 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4617 \begin_inset space ~
4624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4630 \begin_inset space ~
4635 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4636 You can choose between the following five options:
4639 \begin_layout Labeling
4640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4645 Use default page style of current class.
4648 \begin_layout Labeling
4649 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4654 No page numbers or headings.
4657 \begin_layout Labeling
4658 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4666 \begin_layout Labeling
4667 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4672 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4673 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4674 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4675 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4678 \begin_layout Labeling
4679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4684 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4685 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4691 \begin_inset Index idx
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4702 How they are defined is explained in section
4703 \begin_inset space ~
4707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4709 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4716 \begin_layout Standard
4717 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4718 \begin_inset space ~
4722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4724 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4731 \begin_layout Subsection
4732 Paper Size and Orientation
4733 \begin_inset Index idx
4736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4737 Document ! Paper size
4743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4745 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4752 \begin_layout Standard
4753 You can find the following options in the menu
4756 \begin_inset space ~
4763 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4767 \begin_inset Index idx
4770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4779 \begin_layout Labeling
4780 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4784 \begin_inset space ~
4789 What size paper to print on.
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Itemize
4806 \begin_layout Itemize
4812 \begin_layout Itemize
4818 \begin_layout Itemize
4821 US letter, US legal, US executive
4824 \begin_layout Itemize
4830 \begin_layout Itemize
4837 \begin_layout Labeling
4838 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4843 To choose whether to output as
4854 \begin_layout Labeling
4855 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4859 \begin_inset space ~
4864 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4865 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4868 \begin_layout Subsection
4870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4872 name "subsec:Margins"
4877 \begin_inset Index idx
4880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4887 \begin_inset Index idx
4890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4900 Paper margins are set in the menu
4902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4906 \begin_inset Index idx
4909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4918 \begin_layout Standard
4919 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4920 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4921 the paper format and the font size into account.
4924 \begin_layout Subsection
4928 \begin_layout Standard
4929 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4930 has to convert everything into the new
4932 That includes the paragraph environments.
4933 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4934 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4935 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4937 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4946 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4948 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4949 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4950 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4953 \begin_layout Section
4954 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4955 \begin_inset Index idx
4958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4959 Paragraph ! Indentation
4967 \begin_layout Subsection
4969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4971 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4978 \begin_layout Standard
4979 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4980 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4983 \begin_layout Standard
4984 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4985 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4986 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4987 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4991 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4997 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4998 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4999 language than English.
5001 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5004 \begin_layout Standard
5005 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5006 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5007 into \SpecialChar LyX
5009 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5012 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5014 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5015 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5016 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5023 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5024 goes to produce a printable file.
5029 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5031 gives you the ability globally to change
5035 these pre-coded spacings.
5036 We will explain more later.
5039 \begin_layout Subsection
5040 Paragraph Separation
5041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5043 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5048 \begin_inset Index idx
5051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5052 Paragraph ! Separation
5060 \begin_layout Standard
5068 \begin_inset space ~
5076 \begin_inset space ~
5083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5087 \begin_inset Index idx
5090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5096 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5099 \begin_layout Subsection
5103 \begin_layout Standard
5104 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5107 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5109 \begin_inset space ~
5114 dialog and toggle the
5117 \begin_inset space ~
5122 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5125 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5129 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5130 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5134 \begin_layout Standard
5135 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5136 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5139 \begin_layout Subsection
5141 \begin_inset Index idx
5144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5145 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5156 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5160 \begin_inset Index idx
5163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5172 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5176 \begin_inset space ~
5185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5186 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5192 \begin_inset Index idx
5195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5202 installed to use this feature.
5207 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5209 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5211 \begin_inset space ~
5216 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5217 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5220 \begin_layout Section
5221 Paragraph Environments
5222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5224 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5229 \begin_inset Index idx
5232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5233 Paragraph ! Environments
5239 \begin_inset Index idx
5242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5243 Paragraph environments|(
5251 \begin_layout Subsection
5255 \begin_layout Standard
5256 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5268 } \SpecialChar ldots
5278 \begin_inset Newline newline
5281 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5283 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5284 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5285 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5294 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5297 \begin_layout Standard
5298 A paragraph environment is simply a
5299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5306 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5307 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5308 scheme, labels, and so on.
5309 Additionally, you can
5310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5317 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5318 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5319 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5320 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5322 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5324 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5327 \begin_layout Standard
5328 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5329 \begin_inset Graphics
5330 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5336 at the left end of the toolbar.
5338 will change the environment of the
5342 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5343 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5344 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5347 \begin_layout Standard
5356 create a new paragraph using the
5360 paragraph environment.
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5369 because if you are in one of these environments:
5372 \begin_layout Itemize
5378 \begin_layout Itemize
5384 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5396 \begin_layout Itemize
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5414 \begin_layout Standard
5416 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5420 , rather than resetting it to
5425 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5426 \begin_inset space ~
5430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5432 reference "sec:Nesting"
5439 \begin_layout Subsection
5443 \begin_layout Standard
5444 The default paragraph environment is
5449 It creates a plain paragraph.
5451 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5452 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5453 this manual) are in the
5460 \begin_layout Standard
5461 You can nest a paragraph using the
5465 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5473 \begin_layout Subsection
5475 \begin_inset Index idx
5478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5487 \begin_layout Standard
5488 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5489 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5498 for thanks or contact information.
5499 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5500 places all of this on a separate page
5501 along with today's date.
5502 For other types of documents, the title
5503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5510 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5515 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5529 Here's how you use them:
5532 \begin_layout Itemize
5533 Put the title of your document in the
5540 \begin_layout Itemize
5541 Put the author name in the
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5549 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5550 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5556 Note that using this environment is optional.
5557 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5558 will automatically insert today's date.
5559 If you don't want a date, use the option
5561 Suppress default date on front page
5565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5568 \begin_inset space ~
5576 \begin_layout Standard
5577 You can use footnotes to insert
5578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5585 or contact information.
5588 \begin_layout Subsection
5590 \begin_inset Index idx
5593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5600 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5602 name "subsec:Headings"
5609 \begin_layout Standard
5610 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5612 takes care of the numbering for you.
5615 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5617 \begin_inset Index idx
5620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5621 Section headings ! Numbered
5629 \begin_layout Standard
5630 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5634 \begin_layout Enumerate
5640 \begin_layout Enumerate
5646 \begin_layout Enumerate
5652 \begin_layout Enumerate
5658 \begin_layout Enumerate
5664 \begin_layout Enumerate
5670 \begin_layout Enumerate
5676 \begin_layout Standard
5678 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5679 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5680 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5681 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5683 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5685 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5691 \begin_layout Standard
5692 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5693 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5694 You group the book into chapters.
5696 does a similar grouping:
5699 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 is divided into either
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5727 \begin_layout Itemize
5739 \begin_layout Itemize
5751 \begin_layout Itemize
5763 \begin_layout Itemize
5775 \begin_layout Standard
5776 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5784 Not all document types use the
5788 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5793 is the top-level heading.
5801 \begin_layout Standard
5806 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5807 labels it with its number,
5808 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5810 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5824 \begin_inset Index idx
5827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5828 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5836 \begin_layout Standard
5837 The unnumbered section headings have a
5838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5845 at the end of their name.
5846 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5847 the table of contents, see section
5848 \begin_inset space ~
5852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5861 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5862 Changing the Numbering
5863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5865 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5872 \begin_layout Standard
5873 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5874 in the Table of Contents.
5875 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5877 Just as certain classes start with
5891 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5901 This is something you can change.
5904 \begin_layout Standard
5907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5911 \begin_inset Index idx
5914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5923 \begin_inset space ~
5927 \begin_inset space ~
5932 you will see two counters.
5937 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5938 numbers a section heading.
5939 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5943 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5944 Short Titles of Headings
5945 \begin_inset Index idx
5948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 Section headings ! Short titles
5955 \begin_inset Argument 1
5958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5967 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5974 \begin_layout Standard
5975 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5976 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5977 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5978 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5983 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5984 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5985 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5986 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5989 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5991 \begin_inset space ~
5997 This will insert a box labeled
5998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6002 \begin_inset space ~
6006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6009 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6010 This also works for captions inside floats.
6011 There can only be one short title per title.
6014 \begin_layout Standard
6015 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6022 \begin_layout Standard
6023 The following information applies to all section headings:
6026 \begin_layout Itemize
6027 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6030 \begin_layout Itemize
6031 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6034 \begin_layout Itemize
6035 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6038 \begin_layout Itemize
6039 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6042 \begin_layout Subsection
6046 \begin_layout Standard
6048 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6062 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6063 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6064 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6065 the text they contain.
6066 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6074 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6077 \begin_layout Standard
6078 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6087 when you start a new paragraph.
6088 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6092 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6093 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6094 have to change back to the
6098 environment yourself.
6101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6110 \begin_inset Index idx
6113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6122 \begin_layout Standard
6123 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6124 time for the differences.
6133 are identical except for one difference:
6137 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6146 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6149 \begin_layout Standard
6150 Here's an example of the
6163 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6165 See – no indentation!
6169 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6170 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6171 the other paragraph.
6174 \begin_layout Standard
6175 Here's another example, this time in the
6182 \begin_layout Quotation
6188 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6189 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6190 the first line, then
6194 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6198 you were quoting other text.
6201 \begin_layout Quotation
6202 Here's a new paragraph.
6203 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6204 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6207 \begin_layout Standard
6208 As the examples show,
6212 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6213 They should put quotes in the
6218 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6222 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6227 \begin_inset Index idx
6230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6237 \begin_inset Index idx
6240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6256 \begin_layout Standard
6261 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6267 \begin_inset Newline newline
6270 Which I did not rehearse!
6274 It could be much worse.
6275 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6277 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6278 indented a bit more than the first.
6279 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6285 \begin_inset Newline newline
6288 And make things look fine
6289 \begin_inset Newline newline
6295 arg "newline-insert newline"
6301 \begin_layout Standard
6306 does not indent both margins.
6307 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6308 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6311 arg "newline-insert newline"
6317 \begin_layout Subsection
6319 \begin_inset Index idx
6322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6338 \begin_layout Standard
6340 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6350 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6351 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6360 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6361 lets you provide your own label.
6362 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6363 describing some general features of all four of them.
6366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6371 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6373 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6374 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6383 reset the environment to
6387 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6388 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6389 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6393 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6397 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6406 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6407 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6409 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6410 you read all of section
6411 \begin_inset space ~
6415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6417 reference "sec:Nesting"
6424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 \begin_inset Index idx
6429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6445 \begin_layout Standard
6446 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6450 paragraph environment.
6451 It has the following properties:
6454 \begin_layout Itemize
6455 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6459 \begin_layout Itemize
6461 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6464 \begin_layout Itemize
6465 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6469 \begin_layout Itemize
6470 The items can have any length.
6472 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6473 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6480 \begin_layout Itemize
6485 environment inside another
6489 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6493 \begin_layout Itemize
6494 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6497 \begin_layout Itemize
6499 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6502 \begin_layout Itemize
6504 \begin_inset space ~
6508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6510 reference "sec:Nesting"
6514 for a full explanation of nesting.
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6519 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6528 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6532 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6533 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6536 \begin_layout Itemize
6537 The label for the first level
6541 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6545 \begin_layout Itemize
6546 The label for the second level is a dash.
6550 \begin_layout Itemize
6551 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6555 \begin_layout Itemize
6556 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6561 Back out to the third level.
6565 \begin_layout Itemize
6566 Back to the second level.
6570 \begin_layout Itemize
6571 Back to the outermost level.
6574 \begin_layout Standard
6575 These are the default labels for an
6580 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6582 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6585 dialog in the submenu
6590 \begin_inset Index idx
6593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6599 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6603 \begin_layout Standard
6604 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6605 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6607 \begin_inset space ~
6611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6613 reference "sec:Nesting"
6620 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6622 \begin_inset Index idx
6625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6634 name "sec:Enumerate"
6641 \begin_layout Standard
6646 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6647 It has these properties:
6650 \begin_layout Enumerate
6651 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6655 \begin_layout Enumerate
6656 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6660 \begin_layout Enumerate
6662 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6665 \begin_layout Enumerate
6670 environment resets the counter to one.
6673 \begin_layout Enumerate
6686 \begin_layout Enumerate
6687 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6688 Items can have any length.
6691 \begin_layout Enumerate
6692 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6695 \begin_layout Enumerate
6696 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6699 \begin_layout Enumerate
6700 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6704 \begin_layout Standard
6713 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6715 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6716 labels the four different levels in an
6723 \begin_layout Enumerate
6724 The first level of an
6728 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6732 \begin_layout Enumerate
6733 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6737 \begin_layout Enumerate
6738 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6742 \begin_layout Enumerate
6743 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6746 \begin_layout Enumerate
6747 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6752 \begin_layout Enumerate
6753 Back to the third level
6757 \begin_layout Enumerate
6758 Back to the second level.
6762 \begin_layout Enumerate
6763 Back to the outermost level.
6766 \begin_layout Standard
6767 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6771 environment, see section
6772 \begin_inset space ~
6776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6778 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6783 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6787 \begin_layout Standard
6788 There is more to nesting
6792 environments than we've stated here.
6793 You should read section
6794 \begin_inset space ~
6798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6800 reference "sec:Nesting"
6804 to learn more about nesting.
6807 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6809 \begin_inset Index idx
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6821 \begin_layout Standard
6822 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6826 list has no fixed label.
6827 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6836 of the first line as the label.
6840 \begin_layout Description
6841 Example: This is an example of the
6848 \begin_layout Standard
6850 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6854 \begin_layout Standard
6856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6863 it is meant that the first usage of the
6867 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6869 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6877 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6883 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6885 \begin_inset space ~
6891 \begin_inset space ~
6895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6897 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6901 for more information.) Here is an example:
6904 \begin_layout Description
6906 \begin_inset space ~
6909 Example: This one shows how to use a
6912 \begin_inset space ~
6924 \begin_layout Description
6925 Usage: You should use the
6929 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6930 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6932 It's not a good idea to use a
6936 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6937 You're better off using
6949 paragraphs into them.
6952 \begin_layout Description
6953 Nesting: You can nest
6957 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6962 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6963 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6964 them from the first line.
6967 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6969 \begin_inset Index idx
6972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6981 \begin_layout Standard
6986 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6987 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6991 \begin_layout Standard
7000 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7002 Here are its properties:
7005 \begin_layout Labeling
7006 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7008 \begin_inset space ~
7011 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7020 of each line as the item label.
7025 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7026 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7027 space as described above.
7030 \begin_layout Labeling
7031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7032 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7033 uses different margins for the item label and the
7034 body of the item text.
7035 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7036 label width plus a little extra space.
7039 \begin_layout Labeling
7040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7042 \begin_inset space ~
7045 width \SpecialChar LyX
7046 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7047 If the label width is larger, the label
7048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7055 into the first line.
7056 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7057 margin of the rest of the item text.
7060 \begin_layout Labeling
7061 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7063 \begin_inset space ~
7066 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7071 environment has the same left margin.
7072 \begin_inset Newline newline
7075 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7078 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7080 \begin_inset space ~
7085 dialog (toolbar button
7088 arg "layout-paragraph"
7095 \begin_inset space ~
7100 determines the default label width.
7101 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7110 multiple times instead.
7111 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7121 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7124 \begin_inset space ~
7129 every time you alter a label in a
7134 \begin_inset Newline newline
7137 The predefined default width is the length of
7138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7146 \begin_inset space ~
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7157 list the same way as the
7161 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7167 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7171 \begin_layout Standard
7176 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7177 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7179 \begin_inset space ~
7183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7185 reference "sec:Nesting"
7189 to learn about nesting.
7192 \begin_layout Standard
7193 There is yet another feature of the
7197 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7198 left-justifies the item labels by
7200 You can use additional
7204 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7205 justifies the item label.
7210 are documented in section
7211 \begin_inset space ~
7215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7217 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7222 Here are some examples:
7225 \begin_layout Labeling
7226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7227 Left The default for
7234 \begin_layout Labeling
7235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7236 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7243 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7246 \begin_layout Labeling
7247 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7248 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7252 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7259 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7262 \begin_layout Subsection
7264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7266 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7271 \begin_inset Index idx
7274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7283 \begin_layout Standard
7284 The features described in this section require that the module
7286 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7288 is loaded in the document settings.
7289 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7295 \begin_inset Index idx
7298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7309 Custom Enumerate Lists
7310 \begin_inset Index idx
7313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7314 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7322 \begin_layout Standard
7324 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7330 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7331 There you add the command
7334 \begin_layout Standard
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7355 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7356 Code, look at section
7357 \begin_inset space ~
7361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7363 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7376 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7383 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7384 For capital Roman numerals replace
7396 in the command above.
7397 For Arabic numerals use
7405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7412 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7427 \begin_layout Standard
7429 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7437 You can only number 26
7438 \begin_inset space ~
7441 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7449 \begin_layout Standard
7450 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7451 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7454 \begin_layout Standard
7455 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7458 \begin_layout Enumerate
7459 \begin_inset Argument 1
7462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7488 \begin_layout Enumerate
7489 \begin_inset Argument 1
7492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7515 \begin_layout Enumerate
7520 \begin_layout Enumerate
7521 \begin_inset Argument 1
7524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7548 \begin_layout Enumerate
7549 \begin_inset Argument 1
7552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7578 \begin_layout Standard
7579 For this list these commands were used:
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7593 \begin_inset Newline newline
7601 \begin_inset Newline newline
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7619 \begin_layout Standard
7626 makes the label emphasized and
7635 \begin_layout Standard
7636 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7644 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7645 lists until you change the definition.
7653 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7655 \begin_inset Index idx
7658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7659 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7667 \begin_layout Standard
7668 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7671 \begin_layout Enumerate
7672 \begin_inset Argument 1
7675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7694 \begin_inset Note Note
7697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7698 goes back to default numbering
7706 \begin_layout Enumerate
7710 \begin_layout Standard
7714 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7718 \begin_layout Standard
7719 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7725 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7726 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7727 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7728 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7729 , but in the output.
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7743 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7752 \begin_layout Standard
7753 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7755 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7756 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7757 of a normal enumeration.
7758 There, insert the command
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7772 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7776 \begin_layout Enumerate
7780 \begin_layout Enumerate
7784 \begin_layout Standard
7785 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7788 \begin_layout Enumerate
7789 \begin_inset Argument 1
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7808 This enumeration starts at 4
7811 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7813 \begin_inset Index idx
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7825 \begin_layout Standard
7826 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7828 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 \begin_layout Itemize
7836 with standard spacing
7839 \begin_layout Standard
7840 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7842 Add there the command
7846 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7849 \begin_layout Itemize
7850 \begin_inset Argument 1
7853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7872 \begin_layout Itemize
7876 \begin_layout Itemize
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7881 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7888 \begin_inset Index idx
7891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7899 For more information see its documentation,
7900 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7910 \begin_layout Standard
7911 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7913 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7914 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7915 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7918 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7921 \begin_layout Enumerate
7922 \begin_inset Argument 1
7925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7933 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7946 \begin_layout Enumerate
7947 with negative indentation
7950 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7951 Further Customization
7952 \begin_inset Index idx
7955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7956 Lists ! Customization
7964 \begin_layout Standard
7965 You can also change the style of description lists.
7969 \begin_layout Standard
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7976 changes the description label font, the command
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7985 \begin_layout Standard
7986 sets the list style.
7989 \begin_layout Standard
7990 An example where the command
7993 \begin_layout Standard
7998 itshape, style=nextline
8001 \begin_layout Standard
8005 \begin_layout Description
8007 \begin_inset space ~
8011 \begin_inset Argument 1
8014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8020 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8022 itshape, style=nextline
8032 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8033 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8037 \begin_layout Description
8039 \begin_inset space ~
8042 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8043 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8044 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8047 \begin_layout Standard
8048 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8054 \begin_inset Index idx
8057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8065 For more information see its documentation
8066 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8076 \begin_layout Subsection
8078 \begin_inset Index idx
8081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8090 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8092 \begin_inset space ~
8095 Address: An Overview
8098 \begin_layout Standard
8099 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8100 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8108 \begin_inset space ~
8114 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8115 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8116 gags on the document.
8117 In contrast, you can use the
8124 \begin_inset space ~
8129 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8130 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8134 \begin_layout Standard
8135 Of course, you're not limited to using
8142 \begin_inset space ~
8151 \begin_inset space ~
8156 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8157 some European academic papers.
8160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8164 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8171 \begin_layout Standard
8176 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8177 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8181 \begin_inset space ~
8186 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8187 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8188 Here's an example of each:
8191 \begin_layout Right Address
8193 \begin_inset Newline newline
8197 \begin_inset Newline newline
8201 \begin_inset Newline newline
8204 When is it? What is today?
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8211 \begin_inset space ~
8217 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8219 the largest block of text on a single line.
8220 Here's an example of the
8227 \begin_layout Address
8229 \begin_inset Newline newline
8232 Where do I send this
8233 \begin_inset Newline newline
8236 Your post office and country
8239 \begin_layout Standard
8240 As you can see, both
8247 \begin_inset space ~
8252 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8257 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8258 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8264 This makes sense, since
8272 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8273 Thus, you have to use
8280 arg "newline-insert newline"
8285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8286 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8288 \begin_inset space ~
8292 \begin_inset space ~
8297 ) to start a new line in an
8304 \begin_inset space ~
8312 \begin_layout Subsection
8316 \begin_layout Standard
8317 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8318 or list of references.
8320 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8325 \begin_inset Index idx
8328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8337 \begin_layout Standard
8342 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8343 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8344 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8345 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8349 in anything else or vice versa.
8355 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8356 The book document classes ignores the
8360 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8364 in a letter document class.
8367 \begin_layout Standard
8372 environment does several things for you.
8373 First, it puts the centered label
8374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8382 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8384 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8385 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8386 the subsequent text.
8387 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8389 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8393 \begin_layout Standard
8394 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8398 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8399 The new paragraph will still be in the
8404 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8405 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8409 \begin_inset Float figure
8416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8418 \begin_inset Graphics
8419 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8427 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8432 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 We would love to demonstrate the
8458 environment, but since this document is in the
8459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8466 class, we can't do this.
8467 We inserted it therefore as figure
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8474 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8479 If you have never heard of an
8480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8487 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8490 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8492 \begin_inset Index idx
8495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8504 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8511 \begin_layout Standard
8516 environment is used to list references.
8517 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8518 only use it at the end of the document.
8530 \begin_layout Standard
8531 When you first open a
8535 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8536 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8552 depending on the document class.
8553 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8554 Each paragraph of the
8558 environment is a bibliography entry.
8563 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8564 Each new paragraph is still in the
8571 \begin_layout Standard
8572 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8573 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8575 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8577 handling, have a look at section
8578 \begin_inset space ~
8582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8584 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8591 \begin_layout Subsection
8592 Special Environments
8595 \begin_layout Standard
8597 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8598 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8601 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8606 \begin_inset Index idx
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8619 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8626 \begin_layout Standard
8632 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8634 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8639 key as a fixed whitespace.
8643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8656 \begin_inset space ~
8661 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8679 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8682 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8685 arg "newline-insert newline"
8702 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8703 So, when you finish using the
8708 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8709 Also, you can nest the
8714 environment inside of others.
8717 \begin_layout Standard
8718 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8725 arg "newline-insert newline"
8728 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8733 \begin_inset space \space{}
8743 arg "newline-insert newline"
8749 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 arg "newline-insert newline"
8763 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8770 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8771 You must put at least one
8775 in any line you want blank.
8776 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8780 \begin_layout Itemize
8781 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8785 since that will insert
8790 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8793 arg "self-insert \""
8799 \begin_layout Standard
8803 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8807 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8811 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8815 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8819 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8820 printf("Hello World!
8825 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8829 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8833 \begin_layout Standard
8834 This is just the standard
8835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8845 \begin_layout Standard
8851 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8853 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8854 as if you used a typewriter.
8855 \begin_inset Index idx
8858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8859 Paragraph environments|)
8864 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8867 Program Code Listings
8872 \begin_inset space ~
8880 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8884 \begin_inset Index idx
8887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8896 \begin_layout Standard
8901 environment is similar to the
8906 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8907 computer console text.
8912 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8926 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8927 you can have empty lines.
8940 \begin_layout Itemize
8941 have a certain language and a text style
8944 \begin_layout Itemize
8945 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8946 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8947 and \SpecialChar TeX
8951 \begin_layout Standard
8952 Because of these properties
8956 works like a typewriter.
8960 \begin_layout Verbatim
8964 \begin_layout Verbatim
8967 The following 2 lines are empty:
8970 \begin_layout Verbatim
8974 \begin_layout Verbatim
8978 \begin_layout Verbatim
8979 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8984 \begin_layout Standard
8989 environment is identical to
8993 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8994 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9001 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9005 \begin_layout Section
9006 Nesting Environments
9007 \begin_inset Index idx
9010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9011 Nesting ! Environments
9017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9026 \begin_layout Subsection
9030 \begin_layout Standard
9032 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9034 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9036 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9038 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9050 \begin_layout Enumerate
9054 \begin_layout Enumerate
9059 \begin_layout Enumerate
9063 \begin_layout Enumerate
9068 \begin_layout Enumerate
9072 \begin_layout Standard
9073 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9074 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9076 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9078 \begin_inset space ~
9082 \begin_inset space ~
9090 \begin_inset space ~
9094 \begin_inset space ~
9099 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9101 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9104 arg "depth-increment"
9110 arg "depth-decrement"
9124 arg "depth-increment"
9130 arg "depth-decrement"
9134 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9135 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9139 \begin_layout Standard
9140 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9141 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9142 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9143 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9144 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9150 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9152 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9155 \begin_layout Subsection
9156 What You Can and Can't Nest
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9160 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9161 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9165 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9166 than a simple yes or no.
9167 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9170 \begin_layout Itemize
9171 Completely unnestable
9174 \begin_layout Itemize
9175 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9179 \begin_layout Itemize
9180 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9185 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9186 environments have them:
9189 \begin_layout Description
9190 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9191 Can't nest into them.
9195 \begin_layout Itemize
9201 \begin_layout Itemize
9207 \begin_layout Itemize
9213 \begin_layout Itemize
9219 \begin_layout Itemize
9226 \begin_layout Description
9228 \begin_inset space ~
9231 Nestable You can nest them.
9232 You can nest other things into them.
9236 \begin_layout Itemize
9242 \begin_layout Itemize
9248 \begin_layout Itemize
9254 \begin_layout Itemize
9260 \begin_layout Itemize
9266 \begin_layout Itemize
9272 \begin_layout Itemize
9278 \begin_layout Itemize
9285 \begin_layout Itemize
9291 \begin_layout Itemize
9298 \begin_layout Description
9299 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9300 You can't nest anything into them.
9304 \begin_layout Itemize
9310 \begin_layout Itemize
9316 \begin_layout Itemize
9322 \begin_layout Itemize
9328 \begin_layout Itemize
9334 \begin_layout Itemize
9340 \begin_layout Itemize
9346 \begin_layout Itemize
9352 \begin_layout Itemize
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9364 \begin_layout Itemize
9370 \begin_layout Itemize
9376 \begin_layout Itemize
9382 \begin_layout Itemize
9386 \begin_inset space ~
9392 \begin_layout Itemize
9399 \begin_layout Standard
9400 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9408 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9418 \begin_inset space ~
9421 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9422 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9423 nested section headings violate this.
9431 \begin_layout Subsection
9432 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9433 \begin_inset Index idx
9436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9437 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9445 \begin_layout Standard
9446 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9447 affected by nesting anyhow.
9451 \begin_layout Itemize
9455 \begin_layout Itemize
9459 \begin_layout Itemize
9463 \begin_layout Standard
9465 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9473 Figures and tables in
9477 are not affected by this.
9482 Have a look at section
9483 \begin_inset space ~
9487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9489 reference "sec:Floats"
9493 for more information about
9500 \begin_layout Standard
9502 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9503 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9507 \begin_layout Standard
9508 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9516 of its own, it behaves just like a
9517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9524 paragraph environment.
9525 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9529 \begin_layout Standard
9530 Here's an example with a table:
9533 \begin_layout Enumerate
9538 \begin_layout Enumerate
9539 This is (a) and it's nested.
9543 \begin_layout Standard
9544 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9550 \begin_layout Standard
9552 \begin_inset Tabular
9553 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9554 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9556 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9640 \begin_layout Standard
9641 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9648 \begin_layout Enumerate
9650 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9654 \begin_layout Enumerate
9658 \begin_layout Standard
9659 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9662 \begin_layout Enumerate
9667 \begin_layout Enumerate
9668 This is (a) and it's nested.
9672 \begin_layout Standard
9673 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9679 \begin_layout Standard
9681 \begin_inset Tabular
9682 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9683 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9684 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9685 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9769 \begin_layout Standard
9770 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9776 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9786 \begin_layout Enumerate
9790 \begin_layout Standard
9791 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9795 \begin_layout Standard
9796 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9799 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9807 \begin_layout Enumerate
9808 This is (a) and it's nested.
9811 \begin_layout Standard
9812 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9818 \begin_layout Standard
9820 \begin_inset Tabular
9821 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9822 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9823 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9824 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9909 \begin_layout Standard
9910 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 \begin_layout Standard
9930 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9936 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9937 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9941 \begin_layout Subsection
9942 Usage and General Features
9945 \begin_layout Standard
9946 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9947 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9956 is the innermost possible depth.
9957 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9961 level #1 – outermost
9965 \begin_layout Enumerate
9970 \begin_layout Enumerate
9975 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 \begin_layout Itemize
9985 \begin_layout Itemize
9994 \begin_layout Standard
9995 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9996 both of them in the example.
9997 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10007 For example, if we tried to nest another
10012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10016 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10019 , we would get errors.
10022 \begin_layout Subsection
10024 \begin_inset Index idx
10027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10036 \begin_layout Standard
10037 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10038 We have several examples of nested environments.
10039 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10044 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10047 \begin_layout Labeling
10048 \labelwidthstring MMM
10049 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10058 \begin_layout Labeling
10059 \labelwidthstring MMM
10060 #2-a This is level #2.
10061 We created it by using
10064 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 \begin_layout Labeling
10078 \labelwidthstring MMM
10079 #3-a This is level #3.
10080 This time, we just enter
10087 arg "depth-increment"
10091 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10095 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10101 arg "depth-increment"
10108 \begin_layout Standard
10113 environment, nested inside of
10114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10122 So, it's at level #4.
10123 We did this by entering
10126 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10132 arg "depth-increment"
10135 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10140 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10161 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10164 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10170 \begin_layout Labeling
10171 \labelwidthstring MMM
10172 #4-a This is level #4.
10176 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10179 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10184 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10188 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10193 keep nesting things inside
10194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10205 \begin_layout Labeling
10206 \labelwidthstring MMM
10207 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10212 \begin_layout Labeling
10213 \labelwidthstring MMM
10214 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10215 and this is level #6.
10216 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10220 \begin_layout Labeling
10221 \labelwidthstring MMM
10222 #5-b Back to level #5.
10226 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10232 arg "depth-decrement"
10239 \begin_layout Labeling
10240 \labelwidthstring MMM
10244 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10250 arg "depth-decrement"
10253 , we're back at level #4.
10257 \begin_layout Labeling
10258 \labelwidthstring MMM
10259 #3-b Back to level #3.
10260 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10264 \begin_layout Labeling
10265 \labelwidthstring MMM
10266 #2-b Back to level #2.
10270 \begin_layout Labeling
10271 \labelwidthstring MMM
10272 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10273 After this sentence, we will enter
10277 and change the paragraph environment back to
10284 \begin_layout Standard
10285 We could have also used the
10301 environment in place of the
10306 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10309 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10310 Example 2: Inheritance
10313 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10314 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10317 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10326 arg "depth-increment"
10330 \begin_inset Newline newline
10333 which, we will change to the
10341 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 environment, at level #2.
10349 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 Notice how the nested
10354 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10358 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10362 \begin_layout Standard
10363 We ended this example by entering
10368 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10372 and reset the nesting depth by using
10375 arg "depth-decrement"
10381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10382 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10391 \begin_inset Argument 1
10394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10395 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10403 \begin_layout Enumerate
10404 This is level #1, in an
10408 paragraph environment.
10409 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10413 \begin_layout Enumerate
10418 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10424 arg "depth-increment"
10428 Now, what happens if we nest an
10432 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10433 label be? An asterisk?
10437 \begin_layout Itemize
10447 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10448 So, its label is a bullet.
10449 (We got here by using
10452 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10458 arg "depth-increment"
10461 , then changing the environment to
10469 \begin_layout Itemize
10470 Here's level #4, produced using
10473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10479 arg "depth-increment"
10483 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10488 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 to get to level #5.
10491 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10496 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10500 , because we are in the
10508 environment (that is, it is an
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10528 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10529 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10533 \begin_layout Enumerate
10534 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10537 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10540 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10543 \begin_layout Enumerate
10547 arg "depth-decrement"
10550 to decrease the depth after the next
10553 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10560 \begin_layout Enumerate
10562 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10567 \begin_layout Enumerate
10569 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10570 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10574 \begin_layout Enumerate
10575 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10584 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10589 reset the counter for the label.
10593 \begin_layout Enumerate
10597 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10603 arg "depth-decrement"
10606 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10607 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10608 into the twofold-nested
10616 \begin_layout Enumerate
10617 The same thing happens if we do another
10620 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10626 arg "depth-decrement"
10629 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10632 \begin_layout Standard
10633 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10638 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10649 The number of other
10653 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10660 The same rule applies for the
10664 environment, as well.
10667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10668 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10671 \begin_layout Enumerate
10672 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10673 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10674 the same detail with how we did it.
10683 \begin_layout Standard
10691 arg "depth-increment"
10698 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10699 the example in parentheses someplace.
10700 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10701 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10702 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10706 \begin_layout Enumerate
10711 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10715 \begin_layout Verse
10716 Now we will add verse.
10717 \begin_inset Newline newline
10720 It will get much worse.
10721 \begin_inset Newline newline
10731 arg "depth-increment"
10741 \begin_layout Verse
10742 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10743 \begin_inset Newline newline
10746 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10747 \begin_inset Newline newline
10753 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10761 \begin_layout Verse
10762 Here comes a table:
10766 \begin_layout Standard
10767 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10773 \begin_layout Standard
10775 \begin_inset Tabular
10776 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10777 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10778 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10779 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10864 \begin_layout Verse
10868 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10878 arg "depth-increment"
10884 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10890 \begin_inset Newline newline
10898 arg "depth-decrement"
10905 \begin_layout Enumerate
10910 : level #1) This is another item.
10911 Note that selecting a
10915 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10916 3 times to put the table inside the
10923 \begin_layout Quotation
10924 We're now ending the
10928 list and changing to
10933 We're still at level #1.
10934 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10935 The next set of paragraphs is a
10936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10943 We will nest both the
10950 \begin_inset space ~
10955 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10959 for the letter body.
10963 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10966 to preserve the depth.
10967 Remember that you need to use
10970 arg "newline-insert newline"
10973 to create multiple lines inside the
10980 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_layout Right Address
10992 \begin_inset Newline newline
10995 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10996 \begin_inset Newline newline
11002 \begin_layout Address
11004 \begin_inset space ~
11010 \begin_layout Quotation
11011 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11015 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11016 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11017 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11018 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11019 as soon as possible.
11020 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11023 \begin_layout Quotation
11024 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11025 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11026 with your order, along with payment.
11029 \begin_layout Quotation
11030 We thank you again for your patience.
11033 \begin_layout Address
11035 \begin_inset Newline newline
11042 \begin_layout Quotation
11043 That ends that example!
11046 \begin_layout Standard
11047 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11048 gives you a lot of power with just
11050 We could have easily nested an
11071 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11074 \begin_layout Subsection
11076 \begin_inset Index idx
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11080 Nesting ! Separation
11086 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11088 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11095 \begin_layout Standard
11096 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11098 For example you need two different enumerations:
11101 \begin_layout Enumerate
11106 \begin_layout Enumerate
11111 \begin_layout Enumerate
11115 \begin_layout Standard
11116 \begin_inset Separator plain
11122 \begin_layout Itemize
11128 \begin_layout Standard
11129 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11135 \begin_layout Enumerate
11139 \begin_layout Enumerate
11143 \begin_layout Enumerate
11147 \begin_layout Standard
11148 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11149 list item and use the menu
11151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11152 Separated <Name> Above
11156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11157 Separated <Name> Below
11160 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11161 ) and before or behind it the
11163 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11166 \begin_layout Standard
11167 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11168 (red arrow in LyX).
11169 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11170 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11173 \begin_layout Standard
11174 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11177 arg "paragraph-break"
11184 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11187 \begin_layout Section
11188 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11189 \begin_inset Index idx
11192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 \begin_layout Standard
11202 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11203 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11205 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11206 be broken at the end of a line.
11207 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11211 \begin_layout Subsection
11213 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11215 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11220 \begin_inset Index idx
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11232 \begin_layout Standard
11233 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11234 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11235 ) not to break the line at
11237 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11240 \begin_layout Quote
11241 Further documentation is given in section
11242 \begin_inset Newline newline
11246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11248 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11255 \begin_layout Standard
11256 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11271 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11280 A protected space is set with
11282 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11283 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11285 \begin_inset space ~
11293 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11299 \begin_layout Subsection
11301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11303 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11308 \begin_inset Index idx
11311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11312 Spacing ! Horizontal
11320 \begin_layout Standard
11321 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11323 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11324 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11328 The length units are listed in Appendix
11329 \begin_inset space ~
11333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11335 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11342 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11346 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11351 \begin_inset Index idx
11354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 Spaces ! Inter-word
11363 \begin_layout Standard
11364 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11365 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11366 at the ends of sentences.
11367 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11368 automatically takes care about this.
11369 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11370 followed by a period; see section
11371 \begin_inset space ~
11375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11377 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11382 To insert a normal space, select
11384 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11385 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11387 \begin_inset space ~
11395 arg "space-insert normal"
11401 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11405 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11410 \begin_inset Index idx
11413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11422 \begin_layout Standard
11424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11431 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11440 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11441 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11442 inside abbreviations:
11445 \begin_layout Quote
11447 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11451 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11454 \begin_layout Standard
11455 or between values and units.
11456 Compare for example this:
11457 \begin_inset Newline newline
11461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11465 \begin_inset Newline newline
11468 10 kg (normal space
11471 \begin_layout Standard
11472 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11474 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11475 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11477 \begin_inset space ~
11485 arg "space-insert thin"
11491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11496 You can also insert the following space types:
11499 \begin_layout Description
11501 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11513 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11517 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11521 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11523 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11526 space between the arrows.
11527 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11531 \begin_layout Description
11533 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11535 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11542 space A line with a
11543 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11547 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11551 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11555 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11557 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11560 space between the arrows.
11563 \begin_layout Description
11565 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_inset space ~
11572 space A line with a
11573 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11577 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11581 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11584 negative thin space between the arrows.
11587 \begin_layout Description
11589 \begin_inset space ~
11593 \begin_inset space ~
11596 space A line with a
11597 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11601 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11605 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11608 negative medium space between the arrows.
11611 \begin_layout Description
11613 \begin_inset space ~
11617 \begin_inset space ~
11620 space A line with a
11621 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11625 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11629 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11632 negative thick space between the arrows.
11635 \begin_layout Description
11637 \begin_inset space ~
11641 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11645 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11649 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11653 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11657 \begin_inset space ~
11661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11664 em) space between the arrows.
11667 \begin_layout Description
11669 \begin_inset space ~
11673 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11677 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11681 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11685 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11689 \begin_inset space ~
11693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11696 em) space between the arrows.
11699 \begin_layout Description
11701 \begin_inset space ~
11705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11709 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11713 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11717 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11721 \begin_inset space ~
11725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11728 em) space between the arrows.
11731 \begin_layout Description
11733 \begin_inset space ~
11737 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11741 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11746 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11753 cm space between the arrows.
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11758 \begin_inset space ~
11762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11764 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11768 lists the different space sizes.
11771 \begin_layout Standard
11772 \begin_inset Float table
11779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11780 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11783 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11785 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11789 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 \begin_inset Tabular
11800 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11801 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11802 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11803 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11891 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11900 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11906 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11917 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11928 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11934 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11945 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11975 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12111 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12134 \begin_inset Index idx
12137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12146 \begin_layout Standard
12147 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12148 feature for adding extra space
12149 in a uniform fashion.
12150 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12151 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12152 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12153 equally between themselves.
12156 \begin_layout Standard
12157 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12160 \begin_layout Quote
12162 This is on the left side
12163 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12166 This is on the right
12169 \begin_layout Quote
12172 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12176 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12182 \begin_layout Quote
12185 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12189 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12193 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12199 \begin_layout Standard
12200 That was an example in the
12206 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12210 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12214 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12217 is one in a standard paragraph.
12218 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12222 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12225 \begin_layout Standard
12226 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12229 \begin_inset space ~
12234 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12237 \begin_layout Standard
12239 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12243 \begin_inset space ~
12249 \begin_layout Standard
12251 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12255 \begin_inset space ~
12261 \begin_layout Standard
12263 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12273 \begin_layout Standard
12275 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12279 \begin_inset space ~
12285 \begin_layout Standard
12287 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12289 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12293 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12294 (= opened downwards)
12297 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12301 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_layout Standard
12309 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12311 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12315 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12319 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12323 \begin_inset space ~
12329 \begin_layout Standard
12330 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12338 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12342 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12344 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12345 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12349 option in the space dialog.
12357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12361 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12366 \begin_inset Index idx
12369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12378 \begin_layout Standard
12379 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12380 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12387 What is correct English?:
12388 \begin_inset Newline newline
12392 \begin_inset Newline newline
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12399 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12400 \begin_inset Newline newline
12404 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12415 \begin_inset Newline newline
12419 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12430 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12436 \begin_layout Standard
12438 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12443 \begin_inset space ~
12447 \begin_inset space ~
12451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12455 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12457 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12458 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12462 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12468 \begin_inset space ~
12472 \begin_inset space ~
12476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12479 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12488 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12489 That is why it is named
12490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12498 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12499 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12503 \begin_layout Subsection
12505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12507 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12512 \begin_inset Index idx
12515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12524 \begin_layout Standard
12525 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12528 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12536 There you find the following sizes:
12539 \begin_layout Standard
12552 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12553 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12558 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12561 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12563 \begin_inset space ~
12569 \begin_inset Index idx
12572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12573 Document ! Settings
12578 for the paragraph separation.
12579 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12588 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12592 \begin_layout Standard
12594 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12603 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12604 size including line spacing.
12609 \begin_layout Standard
12615 \begin_inset Index idx
12618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12624 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12625 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12630 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12631 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12640 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12649 s are described in section
12650 \begin_inset space ~
12654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12656 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12665 If there are several
12669 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12670 You can therefore use
12674 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12677 \begin_layout Standard
12682 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12683 \begin_inset space ~
12687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12689 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12696 \begin_layout Standard
12697 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12707 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12708 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12720 \begin_layout Subsection
12721 Paragraph Alignment
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12726 Paragraph ! Alignment
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12737 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12740 dialog (toolbar button
12743 arg "layout-paragraph"
12747 There are five possibilities:
12750 \begin_layout Itemize
12758 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12764 \begin_layout Itemize
12772 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12778 \begin_layout Itemize
12786 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12792 \begin_layout Itemize
12800 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12806 \begin_layout Itemize
12814 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12820 \begin_layout Standard
12821 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12822 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12823 the left and right margins.
12824 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12827 \begin_layout Standard
12829 This paragraph is right aligned,
12832 \begin_layout Standard
12834 this one is centered,
12837 \begin_layout Standard
12839 this one is left aligned.
12842 \begin_layout Subsection
12844 \begin_inset Index idx
12847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12848 Page breaks ! Forced
12854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12856 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12863 \begin_layout Standard
12864 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12865 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12866 force a page break where you want one.
12867 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12868 is good at page breaking.
12869 Only if you use a lot of
12873 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12874 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12877 \begin_layout Standard
12878 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12879 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12883 have to change the page breaking.
12886 \begin_layout Standard
12887 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12889 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12892 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12894 \begin_inset space ~
12900 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12903 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12905 \begin_inset space ~
12910 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12912 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12913 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12916 \begin_layout Standard
12917 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12918 at the top of a page.
12919 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12921 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12922 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12923 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12927 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12931 to learn more about
12938 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12942 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12947 \begin_inset Index idx
12950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12951 Page breaks ! Clear
12959 \begin_layout Standard
12960 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12961 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12962 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12963 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12964 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12967 \begin_layout Standard
12968 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12970 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12971 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12979 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12981 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12982 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12984 \begin_inset space ~
12988 \begin_inset space ~
12993 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12994 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12995 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
12999 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13001 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13002 Suppressing Page Breaks
13005 \begin_inset Index idx
13008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13010 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13014 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13023 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13027 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13032 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13036 \begin_layout Standard
13038 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13039 To discourage page break at
13040 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13042 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13043 certain point you can use
13047 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13049 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13052 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13054 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13061 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13062 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13063 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13064 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13069 \begin_layout Subsection
13071 \begin_inset Index idx
13074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13083 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13090 \begin_layout Standard
13091 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13093 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13096 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13098 \begin_inset space ~
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13110 arg "newline-insert newline"
13114 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13117 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13131 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13134 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13136 This is useful to avoid
13137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13144 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13147 \begin_layout Standard
13148 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13149 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13151 very good at line breaking.
13152 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13153 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13160 reference "sec:Quote"
13165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13167 reference "sec:Verse"
13172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13174 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13181 \begin_layout Subsection
13183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13185 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13190 \begin_inset Index idx
13193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13202 \begin_layout Standard
13204 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13215 \begin_layout Standard
13219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13220 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13222 \begin_inset space ~
13227 you can insert horizontal lines.
13228 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13229 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13230 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13233 \begin_layout Standard
13235 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13246 \begin_layout Section
13247 Characters and Symbols
13250 \begin_layout Standard
13251 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13252 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13253 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13261 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13265 for information on how this is done.
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13269 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13274 dialog via the menu
13276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13277 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13283 \begin_layout Standard
13284 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13292 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13293 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13295 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13303 \begin_layout Section
13304 Fonts and Text Styles
13305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13307 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13314 \begin_layout Subsection
13316 \begin_inset Index idx
13319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13328 \begin_layout Standard
13329 There are two types of fonts:
13332 \begin_layout Description
13334 \begin_inset space ~
13338 \begin_inset Index idx
13341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13347 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13348 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13352 characters) in the font.
13353 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13354 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13355 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13356 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13357 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13358 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13359 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13360 \begin_inset Newline newline
13363 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13364 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13365 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13366 sizes than at small ones.
13367 \begin_inset Newline newline
13381 \begin_inset space ~
13389 \begin_layout Description
13391 \begin_inset space ~
13395 \begin_inset Index idx
13398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13404 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13405 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13406 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13407 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13408 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13409 image manipulation program.
13410 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13411 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13412 \begin_inset space ~
13415 pixels high up to 34
13416 \begin_inset space ~
13419 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13420 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13421 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13423 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13424 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13425 \begin_inset Newline newline
13428 Bitmap fonts are named
13431 \begin_inset space ~
13436 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13439 \begin_layout Standard
13440 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13441 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13442 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13443 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13444 use scalable fonts.
13447 \begin_layout Standard
13448 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13451 \begin_layout Standard
13452 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13454 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13456 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13459 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13460 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13461 font, to emphasize text you use an
13462 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13470 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13472 In \SpecialChar LyX
13473 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13477 \begin_layout Subsection
13480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13482 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13489 \begin_layout Standard
13490 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13491 used its own fonts.
13492 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13493 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13496 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13497 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13498 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13499 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13500 to a word processor.
13501 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13502 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13503 files are very portable across
13504 different machines.
13505 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13506 has increased a lot
13507 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13510 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13512 \begin_inset space ~
13516 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13518 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13523 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13524 code in the document
13525 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13528 \begin_layout Standard
13529 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13530 engines that are also able directly
13531 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13533 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13535 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13537 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13538 that is installed on your system.
13539 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13542 \begin_layout Standard
13543 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13551 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13552 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13560 \begin_layout Subsection
13561 Document Font and Font size
13562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13564 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13569 \begin_inset Index idx
13572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13579 \begin_inset Index idx
13582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13591 \begin_layout Standard
13592 You can set the document fonts in the
13594 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13598 \begin_inset Index idx
13601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13602 Document ! Settings
13612 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13613 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13625 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13627 \begin_inset space ~
13630 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13633 \begin_layout Standard
13638 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13639 This requires that you use
13651 as the output format, i.
13652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13656 \begin_inset space \space{}
13659 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13660 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13661 installed (see section
13662 \begin_inset space ~
13666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13668 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13673 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13675 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13676 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13678 \begin_inset space ~
13681 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13682 cannot determine the family.
13683 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13684 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13687 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13690 \begin_layout Standard
13691 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13692 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13697 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13703 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13705 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13707 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13710 font encoding, this is
13711 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13712 , depending on the document language,
13715 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13716 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13724 \begin_inset space ~
13730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13740 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13741 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13749 \begin_inset space ~
13755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13763 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13784 European Computer Modern
13787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13795 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13798 \begin_layout Standard
13803 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13804 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13809 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13812 \begin_inset space ~
13817 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13823 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13824 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13827 \begin_layout Itemize
13831 \begin_inset space ~
13836 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13849 \begin_inset space ~
13854 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13855 community in order to replace
13859 as the default font.
13860 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13861 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13864 \begin_inset space ~
13877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13878 One difference is improved kerning.
13886 \begin_layout Itemize
13887 If you do not like the look of
13895 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13900 \begin_inset space ~
13906 \begin_inset space ~
13916 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13917 \begin_inset space ~
13920 serif and typewriter fonts,
13924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13925 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13932 \begin_inset space ~
13941 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13946 \begin_inset space \space{}
13954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13958 \begin_inset space \space{}
13964 \begin_inset space ~
13972 \begin_inset space ~
13982 but you can also select your own.
13983 \begin_inset Newline newline
13986 The differences between roman,
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13998 fonts are explained in section
13999 \begin_inset space ~
14003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14005 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14010 \begin_inset Newline newline
14016 \begin_inset space ~
14021 was originally designed for newspapers.
14022 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14023 into the small newspaper columns.
14027 \begin_inset space ~
14032 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14035 \begin_layout Standard
14036 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14049 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14054 depends on the class you are using.
14055 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14059 Note that the font size is the
14064 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14065 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14066 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14067 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14070 \begin_inset space ~
14076 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14077 \begin_inset space ~
14081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14083 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14090 \begin_layout Standard
14094 \begin_inset space ~
14099 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14101 \begin_inset space ~
14104 serif or typewriter.
14109 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14119 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14122 \begin_layout Standard
14127 LaTeX font encoding
14129 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14130 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14136 \begin_inset Index idx
14139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14147 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14149 \begin_inset space ~
14153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14155 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14162 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14163 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14164 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14168 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14176 \begin_layout Standard
14177 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14179 Use Old Style Figures
14183 Use True Small Caps
14186 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14189 Use Old Style Figures
14191 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14193 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14201 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14205 Use True Small Caps
14207 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14208 of scaled capitals.
14209 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14210 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14211 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14215 \begin_layout Standard
14217 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14218 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14219 provided by the font package (or the
14223 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14228 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14234 \begin_layout Standard
14239 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14240 a font to display the script characters.
14244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14245 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14251 \begin_inset Index idx
14254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14261 So this has no effect for the document language
14277 \begin_layout Standard
14280 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14282 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14283 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14289 \begin_inset Index idx
14292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14294 packages ! microtype
14303 \begin_layout Standard
14306 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14308 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14313 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14314 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14320 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14321 \begin_inset space ~
14325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14327 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14337 \begin_layout Standard
14338 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14342 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14350 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14355 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14356 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14358 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14360 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14363 dialog, see section
14364 \begin_inset space ~
14368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14370 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14382 \begin_layout Subsection
14386 \begin_layout Standard
14387 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14388 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14390 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14391 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14392 choose a math font in the dialog
14394 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14398 \begin_inset Index idx
14401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14402 Document ! Settings
14408 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14409 automatically selects a math font.
14410 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14411 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14420 \begin_inset space ~
14426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14431 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14432 document font is available.
14435 \begin_layout Standard
14436 Note that the math font will not be used for
14440 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14446 or by the insertion of the command
14453 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14454 \begin_inset space ~
14458 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14459 while the math characters do not.
14461 \begin_inset space ~
14464 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14467 \begin_inset space ~
14475 \begin_inset space ~
14480 in the document font settings.
14483 \begin_layout Standard
14484 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14485 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14486 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14487 font (in most cases
14488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14494 \begin_inset space ~
14500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14503 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14504 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset space ~
14518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14524 \begin_layout Subsection
14526 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14528 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14532 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14536 name "subsec:charstyles"
14543 \begin_inset Index idx
14546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14553 \begin_inset Index idx
14556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14565 \begin_layout Standard
14566 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14567 automatically changes the
14568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14571 style for certain paragraph environments.
14573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14574 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14576 This is where we meet the concept of
14582 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14584 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14588 \begin_layout Standard
14590 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14595 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14597 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14619 e., available with all document classes.
14620 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14624 for specific purposes.
14625 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14628 \begin_layout Standard
14630 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14631 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14641 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14645 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14658 — you customized the
14663 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14664 among them, encourage the use of
14676 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14677 \begin_inset space ~
14681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14683 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14688 Rather than fiddling with
14692 , they encourage the use of
14696 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14701 \begin_inset Quotes els
14705 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14708 ), not their form (
14709 \begin_inset Quotes els
14713 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14717 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14718 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14719 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14720 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14721 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14722 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14728 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14732 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14733 With a semantic markup (such as
14737 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14742 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14744 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14745 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14748 \begin_layout Standard
14750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14751 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14752 by \SpecialChar LyX
14758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14760 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14761 Builtin Text Styles
14762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14764 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14771 \begin_layout Standard
14773 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14774 The two builtin text styles can be
14775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14783 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14784 both of these styles
14787 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14795 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14806 style, do one of the following:
14809 \begin_layout Itemize
14810 click on the toolbar button
14819 \begin_layout Itemize
14820 use the key binding
14827 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14831 \begin_layout Itemize
14833 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14841 arg "dialog-show character"
14847 arg "dialog-show character"
14850 ) as described in section
14851 \begin_inset space ~
14855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14857 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14866 \begin_layout Standard
14867 These commands are all toggles.
14872 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14875 \begin_layout Standard
14876 One typically uses the
14880 style for proper names.
14882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14895 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14899 \begin_layout Standard
14901 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14906 is producing text in
14910 , but the definition can be changed.
14915 \begin_layout Standard
14917 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14919 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14927 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14934 \begin_layout Itemize
14935 clicking on the toolbar button
14944 \begin_layout Itemize
14945 using the keybindings
14952 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14956 \begin_layout Itemize
14958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14966 arg "dialog-show character"
14972 arg "dialog-show character"
14975 ) as described in section
14976 \begin_inset space ~
14980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14982 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14991 \begin_layout Standard
14996 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14998 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15000 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15003 packages use a different font
15004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15005 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15011 \begin_layout Standard
15012 We've been using the
15016 style all over the place in this document.
15017 Here's one more example:
15020 \begin_layout Quotation
15024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15032 \begin_layout Standard
15033 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15034 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15035 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15036 the common tendency to overuse
15037 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15044 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15046 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15050 \begin_layout Standard
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15053 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15054 only as font changes and integrated in the
15062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15065 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15072 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15074 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15083 \begin_inset space ~
15086 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15088 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
15094 arg "dialog-show character"
15100 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15102 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15108 arg "dialog-show character"
15112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
15116 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15120 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15122 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15129 \begin_layout Standard
15131 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15132 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15134 \begin_inset space ~
15138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15140 reference "subsec:Modules"
15147 ), or local layout settings (see section
15148 \begin_inset space ~
15152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15154 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15159 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15163 markup for specific functions.
15164 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15169 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15179 \begin_inset Quotes els
15183 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15189 \begin_layout Standard
15191 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15192 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15194 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15200 \begin_layout Standard
15202 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15203 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15208 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15209 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15210 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15215 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15216 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15221 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15229 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15230 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15231 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15232 \begin_inset Flex Code
15235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15237 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15246 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15251 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15260 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15265 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15274 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15275 on screen their formal appearance.
15280 \begin_layout Subsection
15282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15294 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15296 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15310 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15315 \begin_inset Index idx
15318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15327 \begin_layout Standard
15328 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15332 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15334 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15336 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15341 the properties of text passages
15342 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15346 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15347 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15348 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15349 from ordinary dialog.
15350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15354 \begin_layout Standard
15356 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15357 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15358 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15359 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15360 the properties of the respective text passages.
15365 comes in as a last resort.
15370 \begin_layout Standard
15371 Before we document how to
15372 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15373 use custom character style
15374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15375 tweak the text properties
15377 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15378 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15380 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15384 \begin_inset Newline newline
15387 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15388 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15391 \begin_layout Standard
15393 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15394 use custom character styles
15395 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15396 tweak text properties
15399 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15402 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15404 \begin_inset space ~
15407 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15409 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15415 arg "dialog-show character"
15420 dialog or press the toolbar button
15423 arg "dialog-show character"
15428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15431 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15432 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15437 property that you can choose.
15438 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15441 \begin_inset space ~
15446 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15448 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15452 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15454 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15459 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15460 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15461 environments all at once.
15464 \begin_layout Standard
15466 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15468 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15471 properties, and their options (in addition to
15474 \begin_inset space ~
15480 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15492 \begin_layout Labeling
15493 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15507 The possible options are:
15511 \begin_layout Labeling
15512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15517 This is the Roman font family.
15518 Normally a serif font.
15519 It's also the default family.
15529 \begin_layout Labeling
15530 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15534 \begin_inset space ~
15541 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15553 \begin_layout Labeling
15554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15561 This is the Typewriter font family.
15567 arg "font-typewriter"
15573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15577 \begin_layout Standard
15579 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15580 The general differences of these families are:
15583 \begin_layout Itemize
15585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15590 fonts use characters with serifs.
15591 These are the small
15592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15596 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15599 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15600 The following example shows the difference:
15601 \begin_inset Newline newline
15605 \begin_inset Newline newline
15610 text without serifs
15613 \begin_inset Newline newline
15616 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15617 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15624 \begin_layout Itemize
15626 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15631 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15632 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15633 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15636 \begin_layout Itemize
15638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15669 \begin_inset Newline newline
15673 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15691 \begin_inset Note Note
15694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15696 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15697 For more on phantoms see section
15698 \begin_inset space ~
15702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15704 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15714 \begin_inset Newline newline
15723 \begin_layout Labeling
15724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15729 This corresponds to the print weight.
15734 \begin_layout Labeling
15735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15740 This is the Medium font series.
15741 It's also the default series.
15744 \begin_layout Labeling
15745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15752 This is the Bold font series.
15765 \begin_layout Labeling
15766 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15771 As the name implies.
15776 \begin_layout Labeling
15777 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15782 This is the Upright font shape.
15783 It's also the default shape.
15786 \begin_layout Labeling
15787 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15797 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15807 s the Italic font shape
15813 \begin_layout Labeling
15814 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15821 This is the Slanted font shape
15823 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15824 , this is different from italic).
15827 \begin_layout Labeling
15828 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15832 \begin_inset space ~
15839 This is the Small caps font shape
15846 \begin_layout Labeling
15847 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15852 Alters the text color.
15853 Note that not all DVI
15854 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15859 viewers are able to display colors.
15861 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15865 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15867 \begin_inset space ~
15874 , which means that the document default color set in
15876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15877 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15883 \begin_inset space ~
15889 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15975 \begin_inset Index idx
15978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15985 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15991 \begin_layout Labeling
15992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15997 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15998 the language of the document.
15999 Text marked in this way will be underlined
16000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
16001 in the \SpecialChar LyX
16004 in blue to indicate the change
16005 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16006 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16010 \begin_inset Newline newline
16013 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16015 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16016 When using the spell checking (see section
16017 \begin_inset space ~
16021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16023 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16027 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16028 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16030 \begin_inset Newline newline
16033 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16035 Exclude from Spellchecking
16038 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16041 \begin_layout Labeling
16042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16047 Alters the size of the font.
16049 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16055 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16058 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16059 document font size.
16060 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16061 the details, but a general description of what
16067 \begin_layout Labeling
16068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16089 arg "font-size tiny"
16095 \begin_layout Labeling
16096 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16117 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16123 \begin_layout Labeling
16124 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16145 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16151 \begin_layout Labeling
16152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16173 arg "font-size small"
16179 \begin_layout Labeling
16180 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16186 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16194 It's also the default size.
16198 arg "font-size normal"
16204 \begin_layout Labeling
16205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16226 arg "font-size large"
16232 \begin_layout Labeling
16233 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16254 arg "font-size larger"
16260 \begin_layout Labeling
16261 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16282 arg "font-size largest"
16288 \begin_layout Labeling
16289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16310 arg "font-size huge"
16316 \begin_layout Labeling
16317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16338 arg "font-size giant"
16344 \begin_layout Labeling
16345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16350 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16370 arg "font-size increase"
16376 \begin_layout Labeling
16377 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16382 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16402 arg "font-size decrease"
16409 \begin_layout Standard
16414 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16415 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16417 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16418 — use those instead.
16419 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16422 \begin_layout Labeling
16423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16425 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16435 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16436 change a few other things at the character level
16437 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16438 have text passages being underlined
16442 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16443 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16444 days, when you could not change fonts.
16445 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16446 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16447 because some people
16451 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16458 \begin_layout Labeling
16459 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16461 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16468 This is text with emphasize on
16471 This might seem like the same as
16475 , but it is actually a bit different.
16481 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16483 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16488 \begin_layout Labeling
16489 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16496 Don't use underlining.
16501 \begin_layout Labeling
16502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16508 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16516 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16518 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16527 arg "font-underline"
16533 \begin_inset Newline newline
16537 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16540 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16541 when you could not change fonts.
16542 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16543 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16544 because some people
16548 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16553 \begin_layout Labeling
16554 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16558 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16560 \begin_inset space ~
16569 This is text with Double under
16570 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16581 arg "font-underunderline"
16585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16587 \begin_inset Newline newline
16590 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16591 about double underbar
16596 \begin_layout Labeling
16597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16601 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16603 \begin_inset space ~
16612 This is text with Wavy under
16613 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16624 arg "font-underwave"
16628 \begin_inset Newline newline
16631 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16632 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16633 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16638 \begin_layout Labeling
16639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16641 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16646 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16652 \begin_layout Labeling
16653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16655 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16660 Don't use strikethrough.
16663 \begin_layout Labeling
16664 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16668 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16670 \begin_inset space ~
16674 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16682 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16684 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16685 Single strikethrough
16693 arg "font-strikeout"
16697 \begin_inset Newline newline
16700 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16701 changed in the meantime.
16704 \begin_layout Labeling
16705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16707 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16711 \begin_inset space ~
16715 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16717 \begin_inset space ~
16721 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16729 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16737 \begin_inset Newline newline
16740 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16744 \begin_layout Standard
16746 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16747 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16748 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16749 \begin_inset space ~
16753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16755 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16762 \begin_layout Itemize
16764 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16771 This is text with emphasize on
16776 \begin_layout Itemize
16780 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16787 This is text with Noun on.
16789 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16796 , this is a logical attribute.
16797 Normally it's equivalent to
16800 \begin_inset space ~
16810 \begin_layout Standard
16811 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16812 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16819 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16820 chosen a new character style
16821 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16822 applied a text property
16825 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16830 \begin_inset space ~
16833 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16835 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16841 arg "dialog-show character"
16849 arg "dialog-show character"
16852 ) dialog, the settings are
16853 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16857 You can activate the
16858 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16860 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16861 last applied properties
16863 by using the toolbar button
16866 arg "textstyle-apply"
16870 The button lets you apply
16871 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16872 your custom character style
16873 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16876 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16878 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16879 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16880 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16881 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16886 \begin_layout Standard
16887 To completely reset the
16888 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16891 text properties of a selection
16893 to the default, use
16894 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16896 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16906 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16911 from the menu of the toolbar button
16914 arg "textstyle-apply"
16921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16922 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16923 you just set the shape to
16924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16942 \begin_inset space ~
16956 \begin_layout Standard
16958 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16959 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16967 \begin_inset space ~
16979 \begin_layout Itemize
16981 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16994 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17012 \begin_inset Newline newline
17016 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17030 \begin_inset Note Note
17033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17034 For more on phantoms see section
17035 \begin_inset space ~
17039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17041 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17051 \begin_inset Newline newline
17057 \begin_layout Itemize
17059 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17064 fonts use characters with serifs.
17065 These are the small
17066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17073 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17074 The following example shows the difference:
17075 \begin_inset Newline newline
17079 \begin_inset Newline newline
17084 text without serifs
17087 \begin_inset Newline newline
17090 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17091 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17098 \begin_layout Itemize
17100 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17105 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17106 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17107 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17112 \begin_layout Standard
17114 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17122 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17123 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17126 \begin_inset space ~
17131 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17132 the property to be removed.
17133 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17134 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17135 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17153 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17154 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17162 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17166 \begin_inset space ~
17171 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17182 If you, for example, set
17183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17201 \begin_inset space ~
17206 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17215 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17220 \begin_layout Standard
17222 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17225 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17226 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17229 \begin_layout Section
17230 Printing and Previewing
17233 \begin_layout Subsection
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17238 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17239 using \SpecialChar LyX
17240 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17241 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17242 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17243 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17245 Additional Features
17250 \begin_layout Standard
17252 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17255 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17256 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17257 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17260 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17261 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17262 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17263 to turn your writing into printable output.
17264 This happens in two stages:
17267 \begin_layout Enumerate
17268 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17269 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17271 a file with the extension,
17272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17286 \begin_layout Enumerate
17287 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17288 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17289 to use the commands in the
17293 file to produce printable output.
17296 \begin_layout Subsection
17297 Output file formats
17298 \begin_inset Index idx
17301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17310 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17319 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17321 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17325 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17329 \begin_inset Index idx
17332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17334 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17336 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17347 \begin_layout Standard
17348 This file type has the extension
17349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17361 It contains your document as plain text
17362 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17364 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17365 following the rules of the
17366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17369 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17378 \begin_layout Standard
17379 You can export your document to
17380 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17382 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17387 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17388 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17390 \begin_inset space ~
17396 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17397 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17398 bibliography (section
17399 \begin_inset space ~
17403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17405 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17410 If your document includes such material, use
17412 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17413 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17415 \begin_inset space ~
17419 \begin_inset space ~
17423 \begin_inset space ~
17431 \begin_inset space ~
17435 \begin_inset space ~
17441 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17442 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17443 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17445 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17451 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17454 \begin_inset Index idx
17457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17458 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17467 \begin_layout Standard
17468 This file type has the extension
17469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17480 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17483 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17484 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17485 -Errors or to process it manually
17486 with console commands.
17487 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17488 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17489 's temporary directory whenever you
17490 view or export your document.
17493 \begin_layout Standard
17494 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17495 -file using the menu
17497 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17498 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17502 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17503 export variants are explained in section
17504 \begin_inset space ~
17508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17510 reference "subsec:Export"
17517 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17519 \begin_inset Index idx
17522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17532 This file type has the extension
17533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17553 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17554 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17555 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17559 \begin_layout Standard
17560 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17561 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17562 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17563 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17564 when you view the DVI.
17565 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17568 \begin_layout Standard
17569 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17571 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17572 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17577 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17578 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17580 \begin_inset space ~
17586 The latter option uses the program
17588 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17594 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17597 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17598 font access (see section
17599 \begin_inset space ~
17603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17605 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17610 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17611 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17616 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17618 \begin_inset Index idx
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 File formats ! PostScript
17630 \begin_layout Standard
17631 This file type has the extension
17632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17644 PostScript was developed by the company
17648 as a printer language.
17649 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17651 PostScript can be seen as a
17652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17655 programming language
17656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17659 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17664 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17671 \begin_inset Index idx
17674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17676 packages ! pstricks
17686 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17689 \begin_layout Standard
17690 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17694 Encapsulated PostScript
17695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17698 (EPS, file extension
17699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17711 As \SpecialChar LyX
17712 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17713 convert them in the background to EPS.
17714 If, for example, you have 50
17715 \begin_inset space ~
17718 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17720 \begin_inset space ~
17723 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17724 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17726 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17727 EPS to avoid this problem.
17730 \begin_layout Standard
17731 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17733 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17734 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17740 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17742 \begin_inset Index idx
17745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17752 \begin_inset Index idx
17755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17764 \begin_layout Standard
17765 This file type has the extension
17766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17782 Portable Document Format
17783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17790 was derived from PostScript.
17791 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17800 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17801 looks exactly the same.
17804 \begin_layout Standard
17805 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17809 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17813 (JPG, file extension
17814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17841 Portable Network Graphics
17842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17845 (PNG, file extension
17846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17858 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17859 converts them in the
17860 background to one of these formats.
17861 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17862 will slow down your workflow.
17863 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17866 \begin_layout Standard
17867 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17869 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17875 \begin_layout Description
17877 \begin_inset space ~
17880 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17884 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17887 \begin_layout Description
17889 \begin_inset space ~
17896 ) This uses the program
17898 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17901 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17904 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17907 is a new engine, derived from
17911 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17912 access (see section
17913 \begin_inset space ~
17917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17919 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17924 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17925 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17930 \begin_layout Description
17932 \begin_inset space ~
17939 ) This uses the program
17944 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17950 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17951 font access (see section
17952 \begin_inset space ~
17956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17958 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17963 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17964 vertically written Japanese.
17967 \begin_layout Description
17969 \begin_inset space ~
17972 (cropped) This is the same as
17975 \begin_inset space ~
17980 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17981 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17982 to generate good-looking
17983 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17986 \begin_layout Description
17988 \begin_inset space ~
17991 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17995 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17999 \begin_layout Description
18001 \begin_inset space ~
18004 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18008 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18009 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18013 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18014 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18017 \begin_layout Standard
18021 \begin_inset space ~
18030 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18031 works without problems.
18032 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18033 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18037 \begin_inset space ~
18045 \begin_inset space ~
18050 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18058 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18060 \begin_inset Index idx
18063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18064 FileFormats ! XHTML
18070 \begin_inset Index idx
18073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18082 \begin_layout Standard
18083 This file type has the extension
18084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18096 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18097 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18098 When \SpecialChar LyX
18099 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18100 suitable for the purpose.
18101 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18104 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18107 between different formats, which are described in section
18109 Math Output in XHTML
18114 \begin_inset space ~
18122 \begin_layout Standard
18123 XHTML output remains
18124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18131 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18132 features are supported yet.
18136 and the World Wide Web
18140 Additional Features
18142 manual, for more information.
18145 \begin_layout Standard
18146 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18148 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18149 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18155 \begin_layout Subsection
18157 \begin_inset Index idx
18160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18169 \begin_layout Standard
18170 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18171 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18180 or use the toolbar button
18187 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18188 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18189 \begin_inset space ~
18193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18195 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18199 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18201 \begin_inset space ~
18205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18207 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18212 Further output formats can be selected via
18214 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18215 View (Other Formats)
18217 or the toolbar button
18226 \begin_layout Standard
18227 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18228 viewer window using the menu
18230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18236 Update (Other Formats)
18241 \begin_layout Standard
18242 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18245 To have a real output, export your document.
18248 \begin_layout Section
18249 A few Words about Typography
18250 \begin_inset Index idx
18253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18262 \begin_layout Subsection
18263 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18264 \begin_inset Index idx
18267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18274 \begin_inset Index idx
18277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18286 \begin_layout Standard
18287 In \SpecialChar LyX
18289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18300 symbol comes in four variants: the
18317 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18323 \begin_layout Standard
18324 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18334 height_special "totalheight"
18339 backgroundcolor "none"
18342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18343 \begin_inset Tabular
18344 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18345 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18346 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18347 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18349 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18350 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18378 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18418 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18441 system key combination
18445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18446 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18458 and the em dash with
18461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18474 is the Mac label for the right
18484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18497 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18520 system key combination or
18521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18587 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18593 \begin_layout Standard
18594 Dashes can also be inserted with
18596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18598 \begin_inset space ~
18601 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18609 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18610 and 2014 for the en dash).
18613 \begin_layout Standard
18614 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18615 mode and has a length of its own.
18616 Here are some examples:
18619 \begin_layout Enumerate
18620 line- and page-breaks
18621 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18631 \begin_layout Enumerate
18633 \begin_inset space ~
18637 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18647 \begin_layout Enumerate
18648 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18649 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18659 \begin_layout Enumerate
18660 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18664 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18676 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18678 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18679 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18687 \begin_layout Subsection
18688 Dashes and Line Breaks
18689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18691 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18698 \begin_layout Standard
18699 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18700 case and locale, e.
18701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18707 \begin_layout Itemize
18708 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18709 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18712 \begin_layout Itemize
18713 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18717 \begin_layout Itemize
18718 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18719 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18722 \begin_layout Standard
18723 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18724 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18735 allows line breaks after hyphens
18736 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18738 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18741 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18744 \begin_layout Enumerate
18745 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18746 \begin_inset space ~
18749 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18751 The Elements of Typographic Style
18754 \begin_inset space ~
18757 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18760 \begin_layout Enumerate
18761 Unwanted line breaks
18766 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18768 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18771 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18778 Prevent Hyphenation
18783 \begin_inset space ~
18799 in \SpecialChar TeX
18801 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18802 , a protected space does not suffice
18806 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18813 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18814 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18815 in the document language.
18816 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18830 \begin_layout Itemize
18832 \begin_inset space ~
18836 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18846 height_special "totalheight"
18851 backgroundcolor "none"
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18863 \begin_layout Itemize
18865 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18875 height_special "totalheight"
18880 backgroundcolor "none"
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18885 \begin_inset space ~
18893 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18894 \begin_inset space ~
18897 – sont très utiles.
18900 \begin_layout Itemize
18905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18914 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18919 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18920 \begin_inset space ~
18923 – in contrast to an overfull line
18924 \begin_inset space ~
18927 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18931 \begin_layout Standard
18932 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18936 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18937 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18938 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18943 \begin_layout Enumerate
18944 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18945 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18946 or \SpecialChar TeX
18952 \begin_layout Itemize
18954 \begin_inset space ~
18957 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18958 \begin_inset space ~
18961 – sont très utiles.
18965 \begin_layout Enumerate
18966 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18967 \begin_inset Newline newline
18972 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18973 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18975 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18977 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18979 \begin_inset space ~
18985 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18987 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18989 \begin_inset space ~
19000 \begin_layout Itemize
19001 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19002 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19003 should be followed by
19004 a line break opportunity.
19007 \begin_layout Standard
19008 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19009 \begin_inset space ~
19013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19015 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19026 \begin_layout Enumerate
19027 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19028 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19029 or en dashes (see section
19030 \begin_inset space ~
19034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19036 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19047 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19050 \begin_layout Standard
19051 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19053 \begin_inset space ~
19056 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19057 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19066 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19067 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19075 \begin_layout Standard
19076 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19078 \begin_inset space ~
19081 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19083 prevents ligation to dashes.
19085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19092 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19097 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19098 after the input (unless the current text font is
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19107 The behavior was changed since
19108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19123 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19124 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19125 as non-breakable dashes.
19126 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19134 \begin_layout Standard
19137 \begin_inset space ~
19145 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19147 \begin_inset space ~
19150 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19154 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19155 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19156 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19158 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19162 If you used both literal and
19163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19170 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19175 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19176 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19179 \begin_layout Subsection
19181 \begin_inset Index idx
19184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19193 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19200 \begin_layout Standard
19201 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19202 but automatically in the output.
19203 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19209 \begin_inset Index idx
19212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19219 following the rules of the document language.
19221 does not hyphenate text in the
19225 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19228 \begin_layout Standard
19230 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19234 font and with unusual constructs, like
19235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19243 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19244 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19245 This is done with the menu
19247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19248 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19250 \begin_inset space ~
19256 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19258 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19262 \begin_layout Standard
19263 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19264 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19275 would then see the hyphen
19276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19283 as a line break possibility.
19284 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19285 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19289 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19292 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19294 Prevent Hyphenation
19299 \begin_inset space ~
19307 \begin_layout Subsection
19309 \begin_inset Index idx
19312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19322 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19325 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19332 \begin_layout Standard
19333 When \SpecialChar LyX
19334 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19335 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19337 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19343 appropriate amount of space.
19344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19347 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19349 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19350 gets after another word.
19353 \begin_layout Standard
19354 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19355 not work in all cases.
19357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19368 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19369 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19372 \begin_layout Standard
19373 Here are some examples of
19377 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19380 \begin_layout Itemize
19385 \begin_layout Itemize
19390 \begin_layout Standard
19391 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19394 \begin_layout Itemize
19396 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19400 this is too much space!
19403 \begin_layout Itemize
19408 \begin_layout Standard
19409 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19412 \begin_layout Standard
19413 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19416 \begin_layout Enumerate
19420 \begin_inset space ~
19425 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19426 \begin_inset space ~
19430 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19432 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19437 \begin_inset Index idx
19440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19441 Spaces ! inter-word
19449 \begin_layout Enumerate
19453 \begin_inset space ~
19458 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19459 \begin_inset space ~
19463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19465 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19470 \begin_inset Index idx
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 \begin_layout Enumerate
19486 \begin_inset space ~
19490 \begin_inset space ~
19494 \begin_inset space ~
19501 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19503 \begin_inset space ~
19508 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19509 This function is also bound to
19512 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19518 \begin_layout Standard
19519 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19522 \begin_layout Itemize
19524 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19528 \begin_inset space \space{}
19531 this is too much space!
19534 \begin_layout Itemize
19535 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19539 \begin_layout Standard
19540 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19541 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19543 will take care of this.
19546 \begin_layout Standard
19547 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19551 \begin_inset space ~
19557 feature described in the section
19559 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19564 Additional Features
19569 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19571 \begin_inset Index idx
19574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19575 Typography ! Quotation marks
19581 \begin_inset Index idx
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19585 Quotation marks | see
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 \begin_layout Standard
19617 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19618 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19619 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19629 The keyboard character,
19633 , generates this automatically.
19636 \begin_layout Standard
19637 You can specify what character the
19641 key produces by using the submenu
19647 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19651 \begin_inset Index idx
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 Document ! Settings
19660 dialog and switching the
19664 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19665 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19667 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19669 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19673 \begin_inset space ~
19679 \begin_layout Labeling
19680 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19692 \begin_inset space ~
19696 \begin_inset space ~
19700 \begin_inset Quotes els
19704 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19718 \begin_inset Quotes els
19722 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19725 quotation marks (as common, e.
19726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19732 \begin_layout Labeling
19733 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19736 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19740 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19744 \begin_inset space ~
19748 \begin_inset space ~
19752 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19756 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19762 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19766 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19770 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19774 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19777 quotation marks (as common, e.
19778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19784 \begin_layout Labeling
19785 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19788 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19792 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19796 \begin_inset space ~
19800 \begin_inset space ~
19804 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19808 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19814 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19818 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19822 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19826 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19829 quotation marks (as common, e.
19830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19836 \begin_layout Labeling
19837 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19840 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19844 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19848 \begin_inset space ~
19852 \begin_inset space ~
19856 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19860 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19866 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19870 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19874 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19878 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19881 quotation marks (as common, e.
19882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19888 \begin_layout Labeling
19889 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19892 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19896 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19900 \begin_inset space ~
19904 \begin_inset space ~
19908 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19912 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19918 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19922 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19926 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19930 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19933 quotation marks (as common, e.
19934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19937 g., in Switzerland)
19940 \begin_layout Labeling
19941 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19944 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19948 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19952 \begin_inset space ~
19956 \begin_inset space ~
19960 \begin_inset Quotes als
19964 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19970 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19974 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19978 \begin_inset Quotes als
19982 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19985 quotation marks (as common, e.
19986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19992 \begin_layout Labeling
19993 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19996 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20000 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20004 \begin_inset space ~
20008 \begin_inset space ~
20012 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20016 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20022 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20026 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20030 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20034 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20037 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20040 \begin_layout Labeling
20041 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20044 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20048 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20052 \begin_inset space ~
20056 \begin_inset space ~
20060 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20064 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20070 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20074 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20078 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20082 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20085 quotation marks (as common, e.
20086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20089 g., in Great Britain)
20092 \begin_layout Labeling
20093 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20096 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20100 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20104 \begin_inset space ~
20108 \begin_inset space ~
20112 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20116 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20122 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20126 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20130 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20134 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20137 quotation marks (as common, e.
20138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20144 \begin_layout Labeling
20145 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20148 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20152 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20156 \begin_inset space ~
20160 \begin_inset space ~
20164 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20168 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20174 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20178 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20182 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20186 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20189 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20194 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20195 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20196 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20197 the inner marks differ).
20205 \begin_layout Labeling
20206 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20209 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20213 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20217 \begin_inset space ~
20221 \begin_inset space ~
20225 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20229 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20235 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20239 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20243 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20247 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20250 quotation marks (as common, e.
20251 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20257 \begin_layout Labeling
20258 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20261 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20265 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20269 \begin_inset space ~
20273 \begin_inset space ~
20277 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20281 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20287 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20291 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20295 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20299 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20302 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20303 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20307 \begin_layout Labeling
20308 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20310 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20313 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20317 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20321 \begin_inset space ~
20325 \begin_inset space ~
20329 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20333 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20341 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20349 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20357 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20365 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20370 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20375 \begin_layout Labeling
20376 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20377 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20385 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20391 \begin_inset space ~
20395 \begin_inset space ~
20401 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20409 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20413 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20417 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20421 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20425 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20428 quotation marks (as common, e.
20429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20438 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20439 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20441 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20447 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20448 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20456 \begin_layout Labeling
20457 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20458 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20466 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20472 \begin_inset space ~
20476 \begin_inset space ~
20482 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20490 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20494 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20498 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20502 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20506 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20509 quotation marks (as common, e.
20510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20513 g., in North Korea and China)
20514 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20516 \begin_inset script superscript
20518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20520 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20523 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20538 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20544 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20545 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20555 \begin_layout Standard
20556 Inner quotation marks
20560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20561 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20562 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20563 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20564 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20568 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20571 does not necessarily mean
20572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20580 This is why we call them
20581 \begin_inset Quotes els
20585 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20601 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20603 \begin_inset Quotes els
20607 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20610 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20613 arg "quote-insert inner"
20618 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20624 \begin_layout Standard
20625 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20626 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20627 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20628 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20629 If you check the setting
20631 Use dynamic quotation marks
20635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20636 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20639 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20640 they appear in a special color).
20641 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20642 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20644 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20647 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20650 \begin_layout Standard
20651 Individual quotation marks (i.
20652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20655 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20656 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20660 \begin_layout Subsection
20662 \begin_inset Index idx
20665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 Typography ! Ligatures
20672 \begin_inset Index idx
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20706 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20713 \begin_layout Standard
20714 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20715 print them as single characters.
20716 These groups are known as
20721 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20722 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20724 Here are the standard ligatures:
20727 \begin_layout Itemize
20731 \begin_layout Itemize
20735 \begin_layout Itemize
20739 \begin_layout Itemize
20743 \begin_layout Itemize
20747 \begin_layout Standard
20748 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20751 \begin_layout Standard
20752 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20753 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20761 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20777 To break a ligature, use
20779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20780 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20782 \begin_inset space ~
20789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20800 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20817 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20825 \begin_layout Subsection
20827 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20829 \begin_inset Index idx
20832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 \begin_layout Standard
20845 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20846 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20850 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20853 \begin_layout Description
20855 The name of the game.
20858 \begin_layout Description
20860 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20864 \begin_layout Description
20866 The \SpecialChar TeX
20867 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20871 \begin_layout Description
20872 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20873 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20877 \begin_layout Standard
20878 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20884 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20892 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20893 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20894 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20895 converges to the number
20896 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20899 : The actual version is
20900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20908 , the previous one was
20909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20920 \begin_layout Subsection
20922 \begin_inset Index idx
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20934 \begin_layout Standard
20935 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20936 space between two words.
20937 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20947 for units use the menu
20949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20950 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20952 \begin_inset space ~
20960 arg "space-insert thin"
20966 \begin_layout Standard
20967 Here is an example to show the differences:
20970 \begin_layout Standard
20971 \begin_inset Tabular
20972 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20973 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20974 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20975 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 \begin_inset space ~
20986 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 space between number and unit
21005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21014 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 half space between number and unit
21039 \begin_layout Subsection
21041 \begin_inset Index idx
21044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21053 \begin_layout Standard
21054 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21056 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21057 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21058 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21059 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21060 These bits of text became known as
21071 \begin_layout Standard
21072 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21073 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21074 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21075 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21076 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21077 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21078 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21079 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21080 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21081 \begin_inset Newline newline
21089 \begin_inset Newline newline
21097 \begin_inset Newline newline
21100 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21101 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21102 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21104 \begin_inset space ~
21108 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21110 key "latexcompanion"
21116 \begin_inset space ~
21120 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21127 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21128 's page break mechanism.
21131 \begin_layout Chapter
21132 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21135 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21142 \begin_layout Standard
21143 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21146 \begin_inset space ~
21152 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21155 \begin_layout Section
21157 \begin_inset Index idx
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21176 \begin_layout Standard
21178 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21181 \begin_layout Description
21184 \begin_inset space ~
21187 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21188 \begin_inset Newline newline
21192 \begin_inset Note Note
21195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21196 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21204 \begin_layout Description
21205 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21206 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21207 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21210 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21211 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21213 \begin_inset space ~
21219 \begin_inset Newline newline
21223 \begin_inset Note Comment
21226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21236 \begin_layout Description
21238 \begin_inset space ~
21241 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21242 set in the document settings under
21244 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21246 \begin_inset space ~
21252 \begin_inset Newline newline
21256 \begin_inset Newline newline
21260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21269 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21270 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21275 of a comment that appears in the output.
21281 \begin_inset Newline newline
21285 \begin_inset Newline newline
21288 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21291 \begin_layout Standard
21292 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21300 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21304 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21307 \begin_layout Section
21309 \begin_inset Index idx
21312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21321 name "sec:Footnotes"
21328 \begin_layout Standard
21330 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21336 or the toolbar button
21339 arg "footnote-insert"
21351 \begin_inset Graphics
21352 filename clipart/footnote.png
21361 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21362 's representation of your footnote.
21372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21391 label, the box will
21395 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21396 Clicking on the box label again will close
21409 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21410 and click on the footnote
21425 \begin_layout Standard
21426 Here is an example footnote:
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21435 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21443 \begin_layout Standard
21444 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21445 position where the footnote box is placed.
21446 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21447 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21448 according to the document class.
21450 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21451 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21457 ey are described in the
21460 \begin_inset space ~
21468 \begin_layout Section
21470 \begin_inset Index idx
21473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21482 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21489 \begin_layout Standard
21490 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21492 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21496 \begin_inset space ~
21501 or the toolbar button
21504 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21530 appearing within your text.
21531 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21532 's representation of your margin
21541 \begin_layout Standard
21542 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21546 \begin_inset Marginal
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 This is a marginal note.
21559 \begin_layout Standard
21560 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21561 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21562 pages, right on odd pages.
21565 \begin_layout Standard
21566 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21569 \begin_inset space ~
21577 \begin_inset space ~
21585 \begin_layout Section
21586 Graphics and Images
21587 \begin_inset Index idx
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 \begin_inset Index idx
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21609 name "sec:Graphics"
21616 \begin_layout Standard
21617 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21618 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21621 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21626 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21630 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21633 \begin_layout Standard
21634 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21639 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21640 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21642 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21643 \begin_inset space ~
21647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21649 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21656 \begin_layout Standard
21661 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21662 of the image in the output.
21663 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21667 \begin_inset space ~
21671 \begin_inset space ~
21680 \begin_inset space ~
21684 \begin_inset space ~
21688 \begin_inset space ~
21693 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21694 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21702 \begin_layout Standard
21706 \begin_inset space ~
21710 \begin_inset space ~
21715 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21716 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21718 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21723 \begin_inset space ~
21728 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21729 with the image size is printed.
21732 \begin_layout Standard
21733 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21734 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21736 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21739 \begin_layout Standard
21741 \begin_inset Graphics
21742 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21750 \begin_layout Standard
21751 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21752 the image into a float, see section
21753 \begin_inset space ~
21757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21759 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21766 \begin_layout Subsection
21768 \begin_inset Index idx
21771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21780 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21787 \begin_layout Standard
21788 You can insert images in any known file format.
21789 But as we explained in section
21790 \begin_inset space ~
21794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21796 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21800 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21802 therefore uses the program
21806 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21807 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21808 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21809 \begin_inset space ~
21813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21815 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21822 \begin_layout Standard
21823 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21826 \begin_layout Description
21828 \begin_inset space ~
21831 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21832 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21833 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21837 Graphics Interchange Format
21838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21841 (GIF, file extension
21842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21854 \begin_inset Index idx
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21889 Portable Network Graphics
21890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21893 (PNG, file extension
21894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21906 \begin_inset Index idx
21909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21941 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21945 (JPG, file extension
21946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21970 \begin_inset Index idx
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22004 \begin_layout Description
22006 \begin_inset space ~
22009 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22011 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22012 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22013 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22014 \begin_inset Newline newline
22017 Scalable image formats can be
22018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22021 Scalable Vector Graphics
22022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22025 (SVG, file extension
22026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22038 \begin_inset Index idx
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22073 Encapsulated PostScript
22074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22077 (EPS, file extension
22078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22090 \begin_inset Index idx
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22125 Portable Document Format
22126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22129 (PDF, file extension
22130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22142 \begin_inset Index idx
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22160 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22161 result will not be scalable.
22162 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22176 \begin_layout Standard
22177 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22184 \begin_layout Subsection
22185 Grouping of Image Settings
22186 \begin_inset Index idx
22189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22190 Images ! Settings grouping
22198 \begin_layout Standard
22199 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22201 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22202 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22204 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22205 need to manually change each of them.
22208 \begin_layout Standard
22209 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22212 \begin_inset space ~
22216 \begin_inset space ~
22228 \begin_inset space ~
22232 \begin_inset space ~
22238 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22239 and checking the name of the desired group.
22242 \begin_layout Section
22244 \begin_inset Index idx
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22263 \begin_layout Standard
22264 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22267 arg "tabular-insert"
22272 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22276 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22277 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22278 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22281 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22282 from the rest of the table.
22283 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22284 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22286 Here is an example table:
22289 \begin_layout Standard
22291 \begin_inset Tabular
22292 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22293 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22294 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22295 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22296 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22297 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22491 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22495 \begin_layout Standard
22497 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22498 This corresponds to the
22499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22506 table style listed in the style selection.
22509 \begin_layout Standard
22511 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22512 Other available styles include:
22515 \begin_layout Itemize
22517 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22526 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22530 \begin_layout Itemize
22532 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22533 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22536 \begin_layout Itemize
22538 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22547 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22548 bold top/bottom lines (see
22559 \begin_layout Standard
22561 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22562 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22563 button can be changed in
22565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22566 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22570 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22574 \begin_layout Subsection
22578 \begin_layout Standard
22579 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22582 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22586 This brings up the table dialog.
22587 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22588 cursor is placed currently.
22589 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22590 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22591 done on all of your selection.
22594 \begin_layout Standard
22595 In addition to the table dialog, the
22598 \begin_inset space ~
22603 helps you in setting table properties.
22604 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22607 \begin_layout Standard
22611 \begin_inset space ~
22616 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22617 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22618 current cell respectively.
22619 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22621 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22622 of text, see section
22623 \begin_inset space ~
22627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22629 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22636 \begin_layout Standard
22637 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22638 using the check box
22647 This will merge the cells to
22651 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22652 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22653 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22654 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22655 in the last row without the upper border:
22658 \begin_layout Standard
22660 \begin_inset Tabular
22661 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22662 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22663 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22664 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22666 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22797 \begin_layout Standard
22798 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22799 -arguments for the table.
22800 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22801 explained in the chapter
22808 \begin_inset space ~
22814 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22815 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22816 but are visible in the output.
22819 \begin_layout Standard
22820 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22828 Most DVI-viewers are
22832 able to display rotations.
22840 \begin_layout Standard
22845 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22850 adds lines for all cell borders.
22853 \begin_layout Subsection
22855 \begin_inset Index idx
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22859 Tables ! Multi-page
22865 \begin_inset Index idx
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22877 \begin_layout Standard
22878 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22881 \begin_inset space ~
22885 \begin_inset space ~
22893 \begin_inset space ~
22898 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22899 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22902 \begin_layout Description
22907 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22908 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22909 Except for the first page, if
22912 \begin_inset space ~
22920 \begin_layout Description
22924 \begin_inset space ~
22929 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22930 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22933 \begin_layout Description
22938 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22939 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22940 except for the last page, if
22943 \begin_inset space ~
22951 \begin_layout Description
22955 \begin_inset space ~
22960 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22961 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22964 \begin_layout Description
22965 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22966 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22972 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22975 \begin_inset space ~
22983 \begin_layout Standard
22984 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22985 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22986 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22992 In this context, first means first in this order:
22995 \begin_inset space ~
23007 \begin_inset space ~
23012 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23015 \begin_layout Standard
23017 \begin_inset Tabular
23018 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23019 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23020 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23021 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23022 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23023 <row endfirsthead="true">
23024 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23035 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23054 <row endfirsthead="true">
23055 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23066 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23087 <row endhead="true">
23088 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23099 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23108 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23118 <row endhead="true">
23119 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23130 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23139 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23151 <row endfoot="true">
23152 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24452 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24483 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24514 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24545 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24576 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24607 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24638 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24669 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24731 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24762 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24793 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24824 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24886 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24948 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24979 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25041 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25103 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 <row endlastfoot="true">
25134 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25145 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25171 \begin_layout Subsection
25173 \begin_inset Index idx
25176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25183 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25185 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25192 \begin_layout Standard
25193 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25194 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25195 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25196 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25200 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25203 \begin_layout Standard
25204 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25205 for the column in the table dialog.
25206 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25207 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25211 \begin_layout Standard
25213 \begin_inset Tabular
25214 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25215 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25216 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25217 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25218 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25363 This is longer now.
25368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25419 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25420 This is longer now.
25425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25451 \begin_layout Standard
25452 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25453 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25458 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25459 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25464 Selection with the mouse or with
25468 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25469 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25470 the selection from outside the table.
25473 \begin_layout Section
25475 \begin_inset Index idx
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25494 \begin_layout Subsection
25498 \begin_layout Standard
25499 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25500 have a fixed location.
25502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25509 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25517 \begin_inset space ~
25522 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25523 too many notes on the current page.
25526 \begin_layout Standard
25527 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25528 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25529 and pages without text.
25530 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25531 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25532 Floats are therefore numbered.
25533 Referencing is described in section
25534 \begin_inset space ~
25538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25540 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25548 To insert a float, use the menu
25550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25554 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25555 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25557 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25558 \begin_inset Index idx
25561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25567 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25568 paragraph within the float.
25569 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25570 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25571 left-clicking on the box label.
25572 A closed float box looks like this:
25573 \begin_inset Graphics
25574 filename clipart/float.png
25579 – a gray button with a red label.
25582 \begin_layout Standard
25583 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25585 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25588 \begin_layout Subsection
25590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25592 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25597 \begin_inset Index idx
25600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25601 Floats ! Figure floats
25609 \begin_layout Standard
25611 \begin_inset space ~
25615 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25617 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25621 was created using the menu
25623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25624 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25630 arg "float-insert figure"
25634 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25637 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25643 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25647 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25648 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25650 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25652 \begin_inset space ~
25660 arg "layout-paragraph"
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 \begin_inset Float figure
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 \begin_inset Graphics
25677 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25687 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25690 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25692 name "fig:A-star-in"
25709 \begin_layout Standard
25710 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25711 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25722 ) and refer to it using the menu
25724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25730 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25734 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25735 vague references like
25736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25743 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25744 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25754 For more about cross-references, see section
25755 \begin_inset space ~
25759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25761 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25768 \begin_layout Standard
25769 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25770 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25771 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25772 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25773 as described in section
25774 \begin_inset space ~
25778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25780 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25786 \begin_inset space ~
25790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25792 reference "fig:Two-images"
25796 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25797 You can also set the images one below the other.
25799 \begin_inset space ~
25803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25805 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25812 reference "fig:Star"
25816 are the subfigures.
25819 \begin_layout Standard
25820 \begin_inset Float figure
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25828 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25832 \begin_inset Float figure
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25840 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25845 name "fig:Undefinable"
25857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25858 \begin_inset Graphics
25859 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25871 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25875 \begin_inset Float figure
25882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25883 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 \begin_inset Graphics
25902 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25914 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25921 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25926 name "fig:Two-images"
25943 \begin_layout Subsection
25945 \begin_inset Index idx
25948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25949 Floats ! Table floats
25957 \begin_layout Standard
25958 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25961 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25964 or the toolbar button
25967 arg "float-insert table"
25971 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25972 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25973 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25975 \begin_inset space ~
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25981 reference "tab:Table-float"
25988 \begin_layout Standard
25989 \begin_inset Float table
25996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25997 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26000 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26002 name "tab:Table-float"
26014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 \begin_inset Tabular
26017 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26018 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26021 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26148 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26169 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26172 \end{array}\right]$
26180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26193 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26214 \begin_layout Subsection
26216 \begin_inset Index idx
26219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26228 \begin_layout Standard
26230 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26231 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26232 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26234 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26242 \begin_inset space ~
26250 \begin_layout Section
26252 \begin_inset Index idx
26255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 \begin_layout Standard
26266 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26268 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26269 \begin_inset space \space{}
26275 \begin_layout Standard
26276 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26277 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26283 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26284 and its alignment within the page.
26287 \begin_layout Standard
26289 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26299 height_special "totalheight"
26304 backgroundcolor "none"
26307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26310 This is a minipage.
26311 The text is set in an italic style.
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26317 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26318 another formatting.
26326 \begin_layout Standard
26327 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26330 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26334 as described in section
26335 \begin_inset space ~
26339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26341 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26346 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26352 \begin_layout Standard
26353 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26363 height_special "totalheight"
26368 backgroundcolor "none"
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26372 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26373 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26379 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26383 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26393 height_special "totalheight"
26398 backgroundcolor "none"
26401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26402 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26403 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26411 \begin_layout Standard
26412 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26418 \begin_layout Standard
26419 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26421 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26428 \begin_inset space ~
26436 \begin_layout Chapter
26437 Mathematical Formulas
26438 \begin_inset Index idx
26441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26448 \begin_inset Index idx
26451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26482 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26489 \begin_layout Standard
26490 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26495 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26498 \begin_layout Section
26500 \begin_inset Index idx
26503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 \begin_layout Standard
26513 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26526 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26528 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26529 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26530 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26538 \begin_layout Standard
26539 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26543 \begin_inset space ~
26548 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26551 \begin_layout Standard
26552 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26553 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26556 \begin_layout Standard
26557 This is a line with an inline formula
26558 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26564 \begin_layout Standard
26565 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26566 paragraph, like this one:
26567 \begin_inset Formula
26574 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26577 \begin_layout Standard
26579 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26581 For example, typing
26582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26595 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26596 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26600 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26603 \begin_inset space ~
26611 \begin_layout Subsection
26612 Navigating in Formulas
26613 \begin_inset Index idx
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 \begin_layout Standard
26626 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26627 achieved with the arrow keys.
26629 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26630 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26635 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26636 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26640 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26644 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26647 \end{array}\right]$
26655 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26660 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26661 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26669 , printed in this document as
26670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26674 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26681 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26682 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26683 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26688 For example, if you want
26689 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26697 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26707 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26711 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26716 , since in the latter case only the
26719 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26724 will be under the square root sign:
26725 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26731 \begin_layout Standard
26732 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26734 \begin_inset Formula
26736 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26745 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26746 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26749 \begin_layout Subsection
26753 \begin_layout Standard
26754 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26755 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26759 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26760 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26761 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26762 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26763 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26767 \begin_layout Subsection
26768 Exponents and Subscripts
26769 \begin_inset Index idx
26772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26779 \begin_inset Index idx
26782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 \begin_layout Standard
26792 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26795 arg "math-superscript"
26801 arg "math-subscript"
26804 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26806 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26809 , type in a formula
26812 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26822 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26828 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26832 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26838 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26844 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26853 , you have to use an extra
26857 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26858 For example, if you want
26859 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26865 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26871 Subscripts are similar: To get
26872 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26878 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26886 \begin_layout Subsection
26888 \begin_inset Index idx
26891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26900 \begin_layout Standard
26901 Create a fraction either with the command
26907 or by using the icon
26910 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26916 \begin_inset space ~
26922 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26923 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26924 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26929 To move back up, press
26934 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26935 \begin_inset Formula
26937 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26940 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26948 \begin_layout Subsection
26950 \begin_inset Index idx
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 \begin_layout Standard
26963 Roots can be created using the
26966 \begin_inset space ~
26974 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26980 arg "math-insert \\root"
27002 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27008 always produces a square root.
27011 \begin_layout Subsection
27012 Operators with Limits
27013 \begin_inset Index idx
27016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27023 \begin_inset Index idx
27026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27035 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27042 \begin_layout Standard
27044 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27048 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27051 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27052 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27053 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27054 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27055 The sum operator will automatically place its
27056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27063 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27065 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27069 \begin_inset Formula
27071 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27076 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27080 \begin_layout Standard
27081 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27083 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27084 behind the operator and using the menu
27086 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27087 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27089 \begin_inset space ~
27093 \begin_inset space ~
27107 \begin_layout Standard
27108 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27117 \begin_inset Index idx
27120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27127 \begin_inset Formula
27129 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27134 which will place the
27135 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27147 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27148 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27162 Have a look at section
27163 \begin_inset space ~
27167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27169 reference "subsec:Functions"
27173 for an explanation of function macros.
27176 \begin_layout Subsection
27178 \begin_inset Index idx
27181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 \begin_layout Standard
27191 Most math symbols can be found in the
27194 \begin_inset space ~
27199 under one of several categories; including
27216 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27220 \begin_layout Standard
27221 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27222 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27223 don't have to use the
27226 \begin_inset space ~
27231 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27233 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27236 \begin_layout Subsection
27238 \begin_inset Index idx
27241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 \begin_layout Standard
27251 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27257 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27263 \begin_inset space ~
27271 arg "math-insert \\space"
27275 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27276 For example, the sequence
27281 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27284 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27286 \begin_inset Graphics
27287 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27292 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27293 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27294 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27295 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27296 , because they are negative
27298 Here are two examples:
27301 \begin_layout Standard
27311 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27317 \begin_layout Standard
27327 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27333 \begin_layout Subsection
27335 \begin_inset Index idx
27338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27347 name "subsec:Functions"
27354 \begin_layout Standard
27358 \begin_inset space ~
27363 contains under the button
27366 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27369 a number of function macros, such as
27370 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27374 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27382 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27389 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27390 avoid confusions, because
27391 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27395 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27401 \begin_layout Standard
27402 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27404 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27408 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27414 \begin_layout Standard
27415 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27416 are placed, as described in section
27417 \begin_inset space ~
27421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27423 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27430 \begin_layout Subsection
27432 \begin_inset Index idx
27435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27444 \begin_layout Standard
27445 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27447 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27448 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27449 commands, for example, to enter
27450 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27453 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27454 Our example is entered by typing
27459 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27466 \begin_inset space ~
27470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27472 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27476 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 \begin_inset Float table
27487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27488 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27493 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27497 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27507 \begin_inset Tabular
27508 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27509 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27511 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27512 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27650 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27758 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27812 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27866 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27920 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27974 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28028 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28073 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28094 \begin_layout Standard
28095 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28098 \begin_inset space ~
28106 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28109 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28113 \begin_layout Section
28114 Brackets and Delimiters
28115 \begin_inset Index idx
28118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 \begin_inset Index idx
28128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28137 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28144 \begin_layout Standard
28145 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28147 For some purposes, using just the keys
28152 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28153 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28154 toolbar delimiter icon
28157 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28161 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28162 \begin_inset Formula
28164 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28172 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28173 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28177 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28180 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28186 \begin_inset Formula
28188 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28196 \begin_layout Standard
28197 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28198 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28202 \begin_layout Standard
28203 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28204 left side and right side.
28205 If you use the option
28208 \begin_inset space ~
28213 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28214 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28216 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28221 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28222 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28225 \begin_layout Standard
28226 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28227 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28228 is to go inside the brackets.
28229 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28234 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28235 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28236 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28240 arg "math-delim ( )"
28246 \begin_layout Section
28247 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28248 \begin_inset Index idx
28251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28258 \begin_inset Index idx
28261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28268 \begin_inset Index idx
28271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28272 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28280 \begin_layout Standard
28281 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28285 \begin_inset space ~
28293 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28297 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28298 Here is an example:
28299 \begin_inset Formula
28301 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28310 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28311 \begin_inset space ~
28315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28317 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28322 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28323 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28324 This alignment is set in the box
28329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28378 for every column as default.
28379 For example, the sequence
28380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28391 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28392 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28393 corresponds to the relevant column.
28394 The result will look like this:
28395 \begin_inset Formula
28398 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28399 column & has & has\,right\\
28400 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28413 arg "newline-insert newline"
28416 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28417 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28419 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28422 or the math toolbar.
28425 \begin_layout Standard
28426 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28427 It can be created with the menu
28429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28430 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28432 \begin_inset space ~
28444 Here is an example:
28445 \begin_inset Formula
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28460 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28463 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28466 arg "newline-insert newline"
28470 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28475 arg "newline-insert newline"
28478 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28486 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28487 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28488 A new row is created by every further entry of
28491 arg "newline-insert newline"
28495 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28496 Here is an example:
28497 \begin_inset Formula
28499 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28500 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28505 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28506 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28507 \begin_inset Formula
28509 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28525 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28526 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28529 reference "eq:asquared"
28534 The other types are described in section
28535 \begin_inset space ~
28539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28541 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28548 \begin_layout Section
28549 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28550 \begin_inset Index idx
28553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28554 Math ! Formula numbering
28560 \begin_inset Index idx
28563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28564 Math ! Referencing formulas
28570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28572 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28579 \begin_layout Standard
28580 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28583 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28585 \begin_inset space ~
28589 \begin_inset space ~
28597 arg "math-number-toggle"
28601 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28602 within parentheses.
28603 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28604 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28605 the document class.
28606 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28607 separated by a dot:
28608 \begin_inset Formula
28618 arg "math-number-toggle"
28621 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28622 You can only number displayed formulas.
28625 \begin_layout Standard
28626 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28628 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28629 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28631 \begin_inset space ~
28635 \begin_inset space ~
28643 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28646 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28647 \begin_inset Formula
28650 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28656 To number all lines use the shortcut
28659 arg "math-number-toggle"
28665 \begin_layout Standard
28666 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28669 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28670 A label is inserted with the menu
28672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28681 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28682 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28683 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28695 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28696 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28697 We inserted in the following example the label
28698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28705 in the second line:
28706 \begin_inset Formula
28708 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28709 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28714 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28715 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28716 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28720 \begin_inset space ~
28728 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28732 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28733 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28734 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28735 as the formula number:
28738 \begin_layout Standard
28739 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28742 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28749 \begin_layout Standard
28750 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28751 's cross-reference box are described in section
28752 \begin_inset space ~
28756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28758 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28763 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28771 \begin_layout Section
28772 User defined math macros
28773 \begin_inset Index idx
28776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 \begin_layout Standard
28787 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28788 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28789 Math macros are explained in section
28792 \begin_inset space ~
28804 \begin_layout Section
28808 \begin_layout Subsection
28810 \begin_inset Index idx
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28822 \begin_layout Standard
28823 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28824 To set a font in a formula, use the
28827 \begin_inset space ~
28835 arg "math-insert \\font"
28838 , or enter its command, listed in table
28839 \begin_inset space ~
28843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28845 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28852 \begin_layout Standard
28853 \begin_inset Float table
28860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28861 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28864 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28866 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28870 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28880 \begin_inset Tabular
28881 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28882 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28883 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28884 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28916 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28943 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28970 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29003 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29030 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29052 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29058 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29059 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29072 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29088 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29122 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29144 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29150 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29158 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29171 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29187 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29221 \begin_layout Standard
29222 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29233 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29235 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29239 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29258 \begin_layout Standard
29259 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29260 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29265 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29266 space when you need a space in the box.
29267 Here is an example where
29268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29279 denotes the set of numbers:
29280 \begin_inset Formula
29282 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29290 \begin_layout Standard
29291 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29292 You can, for example, put a character in
29301 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29305 \begin_inset Newline newline
29308 So it is better not to use this feature.
29311 \begin_layout Standard
29312 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29313 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29317 \begin_inset Newline newline
29320 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29326 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29327 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29333 \begin_layout Standard
29340 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29344 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29346 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29347 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29349 \begin_inset space ~
29357 \begin_layout Subsection
29359 \begin_inset Index idx
29362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29371 \begin_layout Standard
29372 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29374 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29378 \begin_inset space ~
29382 \begin_inset space ~
29390 \begin_inset space ~
29398 arg "math-insert \\font"
29402 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29403 in black instead of blue.
29404 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29405 Here is an example:
29406 \begin_inset Formula
29409 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29410 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29419 \begin_layout Subsection
29421 \begin_inset Index idx
29424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29433 \begin_layout Standard
29434 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29435 automatically chosen in most situations.
29453 For most characters,
29461 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29462 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29467 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29468 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29469 thinks are appropriate.
29470 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29473 arg "math-insert \\style"
29477 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29478 For example, you can set
29479 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29482 , which is normally in
29491 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29495 The four styles are used in the following example:
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29503 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29507 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29511 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29517 \begin_layout Standard
29518 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29519 is set in a particular size with the menu
29521 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29523 \begin_inset space ~
29528 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29529 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29530 will be adjusted to correspond.
29531 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29546 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29552 \begin_layout Section
29553 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29555 \begin_inset Index idx
29558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29565 \begin_inset Index idx
29568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29577 \begin_layout Standard
29579 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29580 that are in common use.
29583 \begin_layout Subsection
29584 Enabling AMS-Support
29587 \begin_layout Standard
29588 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29590 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29606 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29607 selecting the checkbox
29610 \begin_inset space ~
29614 \begin_inset space ~
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29627 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29631 \begin_inset Index idx
29634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29635 Document ! Settings
29643 \begin_inset space ~
29649 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29650 -errors in formulas,
29651 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29654 \begin_layout Subsection
29656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29658 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29663 \begin_inset Index idx
29666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29667 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29675 \begin_layout Standard
29676 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29677 provides a selection of different formula types.
29679 allows you to choose between
29700 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29701 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29708 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29711 \begin_layout Chapter
29715 \begin_layout Section
29717 \begin_inset Index idx
29720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29727 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29729 name "sec:Cross-References"
29736 \begin_layout Standard
29737 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29738 's strengths is cross-references.
29739 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29741 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29742 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29743 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29746 \begin_layout Enumerate
29750 \begin_layout Enumerate
29751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29753 name "enu:Second-item"
29760 \begin_layout Enumerate
29764 \begin_layout Standard
29765 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29770 or by pressing the toolbar button
29777 A gray label box like this:
29778 \begin_inset Graphics
29779 filename clipart/label.png
29783 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29785 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29820 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29821 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29837 \begin_layout Standard
29838 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29843 or the toolbar button
29846 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29850 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29851 \begin_inset Graphics
29852 filename clipart/reference.png
29856 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29858 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29871 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29875 \begin_layout Standard
29876 As an alternative to
29878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29881 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29886 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29887 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29889 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29901 \begin_layout Standard
29902 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29903 \begin_inset space ~
29907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29909 reference "enu:Second-item"
29916 \begin_layout Standard
29917 It is recommended to use a protected space
29921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29922 described in section
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29929 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29938 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29939 line breaks between them.
29942 \begin_layout Standard
29943 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29946 \begin_layout Description
29947 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29948 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29950 reference "fig:Two-images"
29957 \begin_layout Description
29958 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29959 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29971 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29978 \begin_layout Description
29979 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29985 LatexCommand pageref
29986 reference "fig:Two-images"
29993 \begin_layout Description
29995 \begin_inset space ~
29999 \begin_inset space ~
30002 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30004 LatexCommand vpageref
30005 reference "fig:Two-images"
30010 \begin_inset Newline newline
30013 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30014 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30015 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30016 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30017 it prints “on the next page”.
30018 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30021 \begin_layout Description
30023 \begin_inset space ~
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30031 \begin_inset space ~
30034 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30037 reference "fig:Two-images"
30042 \begin_inset Newline newline
30045 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30051 ; otherwise it behaves like
30055 \begin_inset space ~
30059 \begin_inset space ~
30068 \begin_layout Description
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30073 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30074 \begin_inset Newline newline
30078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30086 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30096 \begin_inset Index idx
30099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30101 packages ! prettyref
30107 \begin_inset Index idx
30110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30112 packages ! refstyle
30123 \begin_inset Newline newline
30126 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30127 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30130 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30135 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30143 is the default and preferred because
30147 supports only English documents.
30148 The format is specified by using the command
30152 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30161 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30162 preamble of the document.
30163 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30181 \begin_inset Newline newline
30188 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30193 \begin_inset Newline newline
30204 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30205 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30207 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30208 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30213 , you might do so as follows:
30214 \begin_inset Newline newline
30221 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30222 format{prop}{Proposition
30227 \begin_inset Newline newline
30230 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30231 the package documentation
30232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30234 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30240 \begin_inset Newline newline
30251 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30258 \begin_layout Description
30260 \begin_inset space ~
30263 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30265 LatexCommand nameref
30266 reference "fig:Two-images"
30273 \begin_layout Description
30275 \begin_inset space ~
30278 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30279 label for the reference:
30280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30281 LatexCommand labelonly
30282 reference "fig:Two-images"
30287 \begin_inset Newline newline
30290 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30291 Code, if you want to issue a command
30292 that \SpecialChar LyX
30298 , then you may want to use the
30301 \begin_inset space ~
30306 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30316 This is the form needed for e.
30317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30321 \begin_inset space \space{}
30328 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30329 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30331 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30335 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30339 \begin_layout Standard
30340 You can only use the style
30344 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30348 is always possible.
30351 \begin_layout Standard
30352 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30353 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30355 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30356 \begin_inset space ~
30360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30362 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30369 \begin_layout Standard
30370 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30374 \begin_inset space ~
30378 \begin_inset space ~
30383 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30384 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30385 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30388 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30391 \begin_inset space ~
30396 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30397 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30400 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30404 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30405 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30406 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30412 \begin_layout Standard
30413 You can change labels at any time.
30414 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30416 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30418 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30419 change them all manually
30424 \begin_layout Standard
30425 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30427 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30431 \begin_layout Standard
30432 References are described in detail in the section
30443 \begin_layout Section
30444 Table of Contents and other Listings
30445 \begin_inset Index idx
30448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30455 \begin_inset Index idx
30458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30459 Navigating ! Outline
30465 \begin_inset Index idx
30468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30484 \begin_layout Subsection
30486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30488 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30495 \begin_layout Standard
30496 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30498 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30499 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30501 \begin_inset space ~
30505 \begin_inset space ~
30511 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30513 If you click on it, the
30517 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30518 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30519 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30521 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30523 \begin_inset space ~
30528 that is described in section
30529 \begin_inset space ~
30533 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30535 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30542 \begin_layout Standard
30543 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30544 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30546 \begin_inset space ~
30550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30552 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30556 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30558 \begin_inset space ~
30562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30564 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30568 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30570 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30573 \begin_layout Subsection
30574 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30577 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30584 \begin_layout Standard
30585 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30587 You can insert them via the
30589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30590 List/Contents/References
30593 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30596 \begin_layout Section
30597 URLs and Hyperlinks
30598 \begin_inset Index idx
30601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 \begin_inset Index idx
30611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30620 \begin_layout Subsection
30622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30631 \begin_layout Standard
30632 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30634 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30640 \begin_layout Standard
30641 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30643 \begin_inset Flex URL
30646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30648 https://www.lyx.org
30656 \begin_layout Standard
30657 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30663 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30667 \begin_layout Standard
30668 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30676 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30685 \begin_layout Subsection
30687 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30689 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30696 \begin_layout Standard
30697 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30699 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30702 or with the toolbar button
30709 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30718 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30719 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30720 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30722 name "LyX's homepage"
30723 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30728 , an Email address like this:
30729 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30731 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30732 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30738 , or a link to a file.
30743 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30751 \begin_layout Standard
30752 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30765 to the link target.
30768 \begin_layout Standard
30769 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30770 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30771 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30772 the text style dialog.
30773 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30777 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30779 name "LyX's homepage"
30780 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30788 \begin_layout Standard
30789 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30793 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30795 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30796 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30800 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30802 \begin_inset Newline newline
30810 \begin_inset Newline newline
30817 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30818 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30822 \begin_layout Section
30824 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30826 \begin_inset Index idx
30829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30838 name "sec:Counters"
30845 \begin_layout Standard
30847 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30848 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30849 is its ability to manage counters.
30850 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30851 modify counters directly.
30852 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30854 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30860 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30861 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30862 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30863 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30864 to set the section counter to four.
30871 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30872 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30873 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30874 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30877 \begin_layout Standard
30879 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30880 There are five commands you can use:
30883 \begin_layout Enumerate
30885 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30886 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30889 \begin_layout Enumerate
30891 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30892 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30893 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30896 \begin_layout Enumerate
30898 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30899 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30902 \begin_layout Enumerate
30904 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30905 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30909 \begin_layout Enumerate
30911 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30912 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30915 \begin_layout Standard
30917 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30918 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30919 those that are available in the current document class.
30924 \begin_layout Section
30926 \begin_inset Index idx
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30938 name "sec:Appendices"
30945 \begin_layout Standard
30946 Appendices are created with the menu
30948 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30950 \begin_inset space ~
30954 \begin_inset space ~
30960 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30961 as the appendix part of the book.
30962 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30965 \begin_layout Standard
30966 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30967 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30968 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30969 and the subsection number.
30970 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30974 \begin_layout Standard
30976 \begin_inset space ~
30980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30982 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30990 \begin_inset space ~
30994 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30996 reference "subsec:Export"
31003 \begin_layout Section
31005 \begin_inset Index idx
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31017 name "sec:Bibliography"
31024 \begin_layout Standard
31025 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31027 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31028 \begin_inset space ~
31032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31034 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31041 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31046 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31047 \begin_inset space ~
31051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31053 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31058 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31059 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31060 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31064 using a bibliography database.
31067 \begin_layout Standard
31068 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31069 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31073 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31074 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31075 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31076 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31077 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31080 \begin_layout Subsection
31081 The Bibliography Environment
31082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31084 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31091 \begin_layout Standard
31096 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31098 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31107 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31109 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31110 of ASCII characters only.
31114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31116 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31119 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31125 \begin_inset Newline newline
31129 \begin_inset Flex URL
31132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31134 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31144 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31154 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31155 \begin_inset Newline newline
31162 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31163 the number of the entry.
31168 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31177 \begin_layout Standard
31178 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31183 or the toolbar button
31186 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31190 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31191 containing the available citations.
31192 Select one or more keys from the list and
31202 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31203 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31207 \begin_layout Standard
31208 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31209 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31210 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31222 \begin_layout Standard
31226 Companion Second Edition
31229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31231 key "latexcompanion"
31239 \begin_layout Standard
31240 The \SpecialChar LyX
31241 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31242 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31252 \begin_layout Standard
31253 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31260 \begin_inset Index idx
31263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31272 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31273 the label needs to be given the form
31274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31285 Author A and Author B(Year)
31286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31293 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31300 \begin_inset space ~
31305 in the document settings
31306 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 Document ! Settings
31317 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31319 \begin_inset space ~
31325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31327 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31335 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31337 Once you have done that, the
31341 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31358 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31359 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31360 These two are madatory.
31361 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31364 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31366 ) and in abrreviated form (
31373 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31374 add the abbreviated form to
31378 and the full list to the optional
31386 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31387 If specified like this,
31389 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31390 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31393 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31400 is specified, toggling
31401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31408 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31409 full and abbreviated list
31413 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31414 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31415 the citation references.
31416 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31421 \begin_layout Standard
31422 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31425 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31435 arg "layout-paragraph"
31439 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31442 \begin_layout Subsection
31443 Bibliography databases
31444 \begin_inset Index idx
31447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31448 Bibliography ! Databases
31454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31456 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31463 \begin_layout Standard
31464 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31470 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31472 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31473 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31478 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31480 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31481 your working field in a database.
31482 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31483 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31484 list for that document.
31485 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31489 \begin_layout Standard
31490 The database is a text file with the file extension
31491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31502 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31503 The format is explained in
31504 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31511 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31513 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31515 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31521 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31522 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31523 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31525 \begin_inset Flex URL
31528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31530 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31540 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31541 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31542 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31544 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31546 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31547 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31548 Those are addressed by
31553 \begin_inset Index idx
31556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31558 packages ! biblatex
31564 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31565 (although it has been significantly
31566 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31576 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31577 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31578 might conversely fail to correctly
31579 handle databases that use specific
31588 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31592 \begin_layout Standard
31593 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31598 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31600 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31604 \begin_inset Index idx
31607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31608 Document ! Settings
31620 \begin_inset space ~
31625 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31633 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31634 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31636 \begin_inset Index idx
31639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31640 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31649 \begin_layout Standard
31650 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31653 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31654 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31656 \begin_inset space ~
31662 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31663 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31671 Add bibliography to TOC
31673 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31678 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31679 in the document or just the cited references.
31681 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31686 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31687 differ from the encoding of the document.
31692 \begin_layout Standard
31693 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31694 style file is a text file with the file extension
31695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31706 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31707 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31708 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31709 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31711 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31717 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31718 \begin_inset Newline newline
31722 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31724 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31734 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31739 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31743 \begin_layout Standard
31744 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31749 \begin_inset Index idx
31752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31753 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31759 \begin_inset Index idx
31762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31764 packages ! biblatex
31772 \begin_layout Standard
31773 Accessing a database via
31777 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31780 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31781 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31783 \begin_inset space ~
31789 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31790 you cannot select a
31795 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31799 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31802 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31803 As for the styles, note the following.
31808 \begin_layout Standard
31813 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31826 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31827 file (text file with the file extension
31828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31839 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31840 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31842 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31846 \begin_layout Standard
31851 styles are not set in the
31854 \begin_inset space ~
31859 dialog, but in the document settings.
31860 \begin_inset Index idx
31863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31864 Document ! Settings
31869 However, in the dialog in the
31873 field, which is only visible if you use
31877 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31878 example how its heading will appear).
31879 These options are described in detail in the
31884 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31894 \begin_layout Standard
31895 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31896 \begin_inset space ~
31900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31902 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31912 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31913 Bibliography Processors
31916 \begin_layout Standard
31917 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31918 uses a bibliography processor,
31919 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31920 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31921 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31923 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31924 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31930 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31931 You can do this on a general level in
31933 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31934 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31935 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31938 or for individual documents in
31940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31941 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31945 The following variants are available by default:
31948 \begin_layout Description
31949 biber a specific, modern processor
31950 \begin_inset Index idx
31953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31960 developed exclusively for
31964 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31970 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31975 makes use of; if you use the
31979 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31986 \begin_layout Description
31987 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31988 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31989 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31993 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31996 \begin_layout Description
31997 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31998 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32002 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32006 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32010 features are supported.
32013 \begin_layout Standard
32014 By default (with the
32020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32021 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32034 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32035 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32036 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32039 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32040 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32053 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32054 -based bibliography styles).
32055 This should suit most needs.
32058 \begin_layout Standard
32059 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32060 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32061 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32066 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32067 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32068 You can adjust it in
32070 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32071 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32072 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32080 can add below the selection.
32081 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32082 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32088 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32102 \begin_layout Standard
32104 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32106 These are explained in detail in section
32108 Customizing Bibliographies
32112 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32117 Additional Features
32120 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
32124 \begin_layout Subsection
32126 \begin_inset Index idx
32129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32130 Bibliography ! Citation format
32136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32138 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32145 \begin_layout Standard
32146 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32151 \begin_inset space \space{}
32154 numerical citation (as
32155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32162 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32170 ) or author-year citations (as
32171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32180 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32184 \begin_layout Standard
32185 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32189 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32193 \begin_inset Index idx
32196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32197 Document ! Settings
32202 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32208 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32209 labels, is there to use
32212 \begin_inset space ~
32223 \begin_inset space ~
32228 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32231 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 With a bibliography database (see
32240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32242 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32249 ) one has in contrary to the
32253 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32254 These style formats are available:
32257 \begin_layout Description
32259 \begin_inset space ~
32262 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32263 -based approached without any additional packages
32264 (simple numeric citations).
32267 \begin_layout Description
32268 Biblatex loads the package
32273 \begin_inset Index idx
32276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 packages ! biblatex
32283 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32285 Biblatex citation style
32289 Biblatex bibliography style
32292 Options to the package
32296 can be entered in the
32303 \begin_layout Description
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32309 \begin_inset space ~
32312 mode) loads the package
32316 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32317 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32329 behavior very closely.
32334 this option has some additional styles.
32339 styles are also supported by this variant.
32342 \begin_layout Description
32344 \begin_inset space ~
32347 (BibTeX) loads the package
32352 \begin_inset Index idx
32355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32362 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32365 \begin_layout Description
32367 \begin_inset space ~
32370 (BibTeX) loads the package
32375 \begin_inset Index idx
32378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32385 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32388 \begin_layout Standard
32397 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32399 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32408 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32410 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32411 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32413 Biblatex citation style
32416 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32422 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32426 \begin_layout Standard
32427 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32428 are available in the
32433 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32434 a name prefix such as
32435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32450 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32455 \begin_inset space \space{}
32459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32470 \begin_layout Standard
32471 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32477 \begin_inset space \space{}
32480 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32486 \begin_inset space \space{}
32490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32502 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32506 \begin_inset space ~
32514 \begin_inset space ~
32520 Here is a simple example where the text
32521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32525 \begin_inset space ~
32529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32532 appears after the reference:
32535 \begin_layout Quote
32537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32540 key "latexcompanion"
32548 \begin_layout Standard
32549 All styles except for
32553 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32563 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32567 \begin_layout Standard
32568 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32569 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32570 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32575 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32576 multi-citation (so-called
32577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32580 qualified citation lists
32581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32587 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32592 dialog will display three columns in the field
32599 \begin_inset space ~
32607 \begin_inset space ~
32615 \begin_inset space ~
32621 If you double-click on an item's
32624 \begin_inset space ~
32632 \begin_inset space ~
32637 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32640 General text before
32646 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32649 \begin_layout Subsection
32651 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32654 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32658 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32662 \begin_layout Standard
32664 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32666 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32669 \begin_inset space ~
32673 \begin_inset space ~
32677 \begin_inset space ~
32681 \begin_inset space ~
32684 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32687 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32690 \begin_layout Itemize
32692 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32693 If citation entries include any of the fields
32694 \begin_inset Flex Code
32697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32699 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32708 \begin_inset Flex Code
32711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32713 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32721 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32722 \begin_inset Flex Code
32725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32727 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32735 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32736 \begin_inset Flex Code
32739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32741 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32749 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32752 \begin_layout Itemize
32754 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32755 If citation entries include any of the fields
32756 \begin_inset Flex Code
32759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32761 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32769 (filled by JabRef) or
32770 \begin_inset Flex Code
32773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32775 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32783 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32784 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32785 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32788 \begin_layout Standard
32790 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32791 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32792 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32795 Search drive for cited files
32799 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32800 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32801 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32802 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32806 It uses the tokens supplied at
32810 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32811 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32812 arbitrary position).
32814 opens the first matching file it finds.
32815 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32816 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32817 the chance this works for you.
32822 \begin_layout Standard
32824 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32825 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32826 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32828 \begin_inset Flex Code
32831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32833 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32842 \begin_inset Flex Code
32845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32847 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32855 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32859 Cite format description
32866 \begin_layout Section
32868 \begin_inset Index idx
32871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32888 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32890 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32892 \begin_inset space ~
32897 or the toolbar button
32904 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32905 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32906 by \SpecialChar LyX
32907 as the index entry.
32910 \begin_layout Standard
32911 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32913 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32914 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32916 \begin_inset space ~
32922 A light blue box labeled
32923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32934 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32935 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32939 \begin_layout Standard
32940 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32941 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32942 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32943 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32945 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32947 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32955 \begin_layout Subsection
32956 Grouping Index Entries
32957 \begin_inset Index idx
32960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32969 \begin_layout Standard
32970 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32972 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32973 lists under the entry
32974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32982 First we create the entry
32983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32991 \begin_inset space ~
32995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32997 reference "subsec:Lists"
33002 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33003 \begin_inset space ~
33007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33009 reference "sec:Itemize"
33013 , we insert the command
33016 \begin_layout Standard
33022 \begin_layout Standard
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33032 \begin_layout Standard
33033 for the enumerated list in section
33034 \begin_inset space ~
33038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33040 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 The exclamation mark
33049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33056 marks the grouping levels.
33057 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33058 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33059 If we don't have an index entry for
33060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33067 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33070 \begin_layout Subsection
33072 \begin_inset Index idx
33075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33076 Index ! Page ranges
33084 \begin_layout Standard
33085 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33087 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33088 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33089 an index entry in section
33090 \begin_inset space ~
33094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33096 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33103 \begin_layout Standard
33106 Paragraph environments|(
33109 \begin_layout Standard
33110 and another entry at the end of section
33111 \begin_inset space ~
33115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33117 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33124 \begin_layout Standard
33127 Paragraph environments|)
33130 \begin_layout Standard
33132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33155 respectively start and end the index range.
33156 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33157 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33158 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33159 An example is the index entry
33160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33163 Document ! Settings
33164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33170 \begin_layout Subsection
33172 \begin_inset Index idx
33175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33176 Index ! Cross referencing
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33185 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33186 We referred for example in the index entry
33187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33195 \begin_inset space ~
33199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33201 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33205 ) to the index entry
33206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33213 in the same section using the entry
33216 \begin_layout Standard
33219 GIF|see{Image formats}
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33225 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33226 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33229 \begin_layout Subsection
33231 \begin_inset Index idx
33234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33235 Index ! Entry order
33243 \begin_layout Standard
33244 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33245 follow the rules for the index order.
33246 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33252 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33254 \begin_inset space ~
33258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33260 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33269 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33270 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33295 \begin_inset Index idx
33298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33299 Dummy entries ! maïs
33305 \begin_inset Index idx
33308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33309 Dummy entries ! maître
33315 \begin_inset Index idx
33318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33319 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33324 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33325 maïs, maison, maître.
33326 To achieve this, we use the command
33329 \begin_layout Standard
33332 previous entry@current entry
33335 \begin_layout Standard
33336 In our case we want to have
33337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33352 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33361 \begin_layout Standard
33362 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33363 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33365 See the next subsection for an example.
33368 \begin_layout Subsection
33370 \begin_inset Index idx
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 Index ! Entry layout
33382 \begin_layout Standard
33383 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33384 \begin_inset Index idx
33387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33390 This is an italic dummy entry
33395 You can also format the page number using the character
33396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33403 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33404 -command without a backslash.
33405 We can write for example
33408 \begin_layout Standard
33411 italic page number:|textit
33414 \begin_layout Standard
33415 to get the page number in italic.
33416 \begin_inset Index idx
33419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33420 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33425 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33426 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33444 \begin_inset space ~
33450 Have a look at section
33451 \begin_inset space ~
33455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33457 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33461 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33465 \begin_layout Standard
33466 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33474 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33478 to generate the index, see section
33479 \begin_inset space ~
33483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33485 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33494 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33499 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33500 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33503 key "latexcompanion"
33516 \begin_layout Standard
33517 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33519 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33520 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33521 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33522 If so, put the following in the preamble
33525 \begin_layout Standard
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33547 \begin_layout Standard
33548 in the index entry.
33549 \begin_inset Index idx
33552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33553 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33558 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33559 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33560 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33563 \begin_layout Standard
33564 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33565 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33566 a bold font for all index entries.
33567 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33579 documentation for details,
33580 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33582 key "makeindex,xindy"
33590 \begin_layout Subsection
33592 \begin_inset Index idx
33595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33604 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33611 \begin_layout Standard
33612 If the index generation program
33616 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33617 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33621 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33622 distribution, is used.
33626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33631 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33632 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33633 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33634 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33635 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33645 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33647 dialog, see section
33648 \begin_inset space ~
33652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33654 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33659 The available options are listed and explained in
33660 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33662 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33668 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33673 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33674 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33678 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33682 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33683 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33686 \begin_layout Subsection
33690 \begin_layout Standard
33691 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33692 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33700 next to the standard index.
33702 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33703 that add this feature.
33710 \begin_inset Index idx
33713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 packages ! splitidx
33720 package to generate multiple indexes.
33721 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33727 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33729 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33737 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33738 style, but it also includes
33739 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33740 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33748 \begin_layout Standard
33749 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33750 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33752 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33753 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33756 and select the option
33758 Use multiple Indexes
33765 already contains the standard index
33766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33774 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33775 also appear as a heading) to the
33779 input field and press the
33784 The new index now also appears in the list.
33785 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33786 label color to the new index.
33789 \begin_layout Standard
33790 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33793 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33794 List/Contents/References
33800 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33801 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33802 are additional features:
33805 \begin_layout Itemize
33806 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33807 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33810 \begin_layout Itemize
33811 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33812 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33817 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33818 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33819 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33820 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33823 \begin_layout Itemize
33828 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33829 code in the name of the index.
33832 \begin_layout Section
33833 Nomenclature/Glossary
33834 \begin_inset Index idx
33837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33844 \begin_inset Index idx
33847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33878 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33886 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33887 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33888 called nomenclature or glossary.
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33892 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33899 \begin_inset Index idx
33902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33910 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33912 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33919 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33923 \begin_layout Standard
33924 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33925 and then use the menu
33927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33933 \begin_inset space ~
33938 or the toolbar button
33941 arg "nomencl-insert"
33946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33957 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33960 \begin_layout Standard
33961 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33962 The first is the term or
33966 that you wish to define.
33971 of the term or symbol.
33974 \begin_layout Standard
33975 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33983 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33984 code for nomenclature entries the option
33988 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33996 \begin_layout Subsection
33997 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33998 \begin_inset Index idx
34001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34002 Nomenclature ! Layout
34010 \begin_layout Standard
34011 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34015 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34022 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34030 \begin_inset Newline newline
34038 \begin_inset Newline newline
34044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34051 character starts/ends the formula.
34052 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34053 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34065 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34075 \begin_layout Standard
34076 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34077 syntax is given in section
34078 \begin_inset space ~
34082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34084 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34091 \begin_layout Standard
34095 \begin_inset space ~
34100 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34102 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34107 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34114 in this document is:
34115 \begin_inset Newline newline
34120 dummy entry for the character
34125 \begin_inset Newline newline
34137 \begin_inset space ~
34147 font use the command
34176 \begin_layout Standard
34177 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34182 \begin_inset space \space{}
34186 \begin_inset Newline newline
34202 \begin_inset Newline newline
34205 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34206 This command will make the font of all symbols
34213 \begin_inset space ~
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 If the characters |
34223 \begin_inset space \space{}
34227 \begin_inset space \space{}
34231 \begin_inset space \space{}
34235 \begin_inset space \space{}
34239 \begin_inset space \space{}
34242 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34243 code they need to be escaped
34245 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34247 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34250 character in front of them.
34251 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34253 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34254 LatexCommand nomenclature
34255 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34256 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34262 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34264 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34265 LatexCommand nomenclature
34266 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34267 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34277 \begin_layout Subsection
34278 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34279 \begin_inset Index idx
34282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34283 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34293 -code of the symbol
34295 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34297 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34300 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34301 LatexCommand nomenclature
34303 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34311 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34315 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34316 LatexCommand nomenclature
34319 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34325 They will be sorted by
34326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34352 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34355 will be sorted before the
34359 since the character
34360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34367 is considered in sorting.
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34371 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34374 \begin_inset space ~
34379 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34380 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34382 For the example given, you can insert
34386 in this field for the
34387 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34394 will be located before
34395 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34401 \begin_layout Standard
34402 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34407 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34417 \begin_layout Subsection
34418 Nomenclature Options
34419 \begin_inset Index idx
34422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34423 Nomenclature ! Options
34429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34431 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34438 \begin_layout Standard
34443 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34444 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34447 \begin_layout Description
34448 refeq Appends the phrase
34449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34464 to every nomenclature entry, where
34470 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34473 \begin_layout Description
34474 refpage Appends the phrase
34475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34490 to every nomenclature entry, where
34496 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34499 \begin_layout Description
34500 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34503 \begin_layout Standard
34504 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34505 class options list in the
34507 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34511 In this document the options
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34519 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34525 \begin_layout Standard
34526 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34527 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34532 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34535 \begin_layout Description
34545 \begin_layout Description
34548 nomrefpage Like the
34555 \begin_layout Description
34558 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34567 \begin_layout Description
34571 \begin_inset space ~
34577 \begin_inset space ~
34582 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34594 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34595 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34599 \begin_layout Standard
34608 \begin_inset Newline newline
34614 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34618 \begin_inset space ~
34630 unskip, see equation
34633 \begin_inset Newline newline
34640 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34641 \begin_inset Newline newline
34647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34651 \begin_inset space ~
34668 \begin_layout Standard
34669 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34672 \begin_inset space ~
34677 in the document settings under
34680 \begin_inset space ~
34688 \begin_layout Standard
34696 \begin_inset Newline newline
34700 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34704 \begin_inset space ~
34716 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34718 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34719 \begin_inset Newline newline
34726 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34727 \begin_inset Newline newline
34731 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34747 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34752 \begin_layout Subsection
34753 Printing the Nomenclature
34754 \begin_inset Index idx
34757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34758 Nomenclature ! Printing
34766 \begin_layout Standard
34767 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34770 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34786 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34787 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34788 You can choose between these settings:
34791 \begin_layout Description
34792 Default a space of 1
34793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34799 \begin_layout Description
34801 \begin_inset space ~
34805 \begin_inset space ~
34808 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34811 \begin_layout Description
34812 Custom custom space
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34825 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34833 For example, in order to change the name to
34837 , add the following line to the preamble:
34840 \begin_layout Standard
34853 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34856 \begin_layout Standard
34857 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34858 \begin_inset Newline newline
34873 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34876 \begin_layout Subsection
34877 Nomenclature Program
34878 \begin_inset Index idx
34881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34882 Nomenclature ! Program
34888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34890 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34897 \begin_layout Standard
34903 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34904 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34906 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34911 by adding options, see section
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34918 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34923 The available options are listed and explained in
34924 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34926 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34934 \begin_layout Section
34936 \begin_inset Index idx
34939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34946 \begin_inset Index idx
34949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34950 Document ! Branches
34956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34958 name "sec:Branches"
34965 \begin_layout Standard
34966 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34967 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34968 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34969 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34972 \begin_layout Standard
34973 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34974 allows you to put text into branches.
34975 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34976 To create a branch, either select the menu
34978 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34979 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34982 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34991 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34992 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34993 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34994 and whether the name of the branch should
34995 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34996 (see below for an example).
34997 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34998 to the name of the other) and to add
34999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35011 \begin_inset space ~
35014 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35015 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35018 \begin_layout Standard
35019 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35020 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35022 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35025 where you can choose a branch.
35026 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35030 \begin_layout Standard
35031 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35032 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35035 \begin_layout Standard
35036 \begin_inset Branch Question
35040 \begin_layout Standard
35045 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35053 \begin_layout Standard
35054 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35058 \begin_layout Standard
35063 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35079 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35082 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35083 Consider for example a file
35084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35091 which has the above branches.
35093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35100 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35124 branch were inactive,
35125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35140 branch was active, likewise
35141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35156 branch was active, and
35157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35160 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35164 if both branches were active.
35165 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35166 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35172 \begin_layout Standard
35173 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
35179 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35180 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35184 \begin_inset space ~
35192 \begin_layout Standard
35193 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35197 \begin_layout Standard
35203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35210 branch is deactivated.
35216 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35222 \begin_layout Standard
35223 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35224 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35225 definitions for each branch.
35226 For example you can define for the question branch
35230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35231 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35232 -syntax, see section
35233 \begin_inset space ~
35237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35239 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35251 \begin_layout Standard
35261 \begin_layout Standard
35271 \begin_layout Standard
35272 and for the answer branch
35275 \begin_layout Standard
35285 \begin_layout Standard
35295 \begin_layout Standard
35296 \begin_inset Branch Question
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35332 \begin_layout Standard
35333 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35369 \begin_layout Standard
35370 Now it is possible to use the
35374 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35381 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35384 commands to obtain conditional output.
35385 Here is an example formula where only the
35392 \begin_inset Formula
35394 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35402 \begin_layout Standard
35403 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35411 \begin_layout Standard
35412 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35418 \begin_inset space \space{}
35421 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35423 For this advanced usage, see the
35429 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35434 \begin_layout Section
35436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35438 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35443 \begin_inset Index idx
35446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35459 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35462 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35464 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35470 \begin_inset Index idx
35473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35475 packages ! hyperref
35480 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35481 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35482 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35483 part of the document.
35486 \begin_layout Standard
35487 The header information in the dialog tab
35491 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35492 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35493 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35494 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35498 \begin_inset space ~
35502 \begin_inset space ~
35507 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35508 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35509 and author entries.
35513 \begin_inset space ~
35517 \begin_inset space ~
35521 \begin_inset space ~
35526 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35529 \begin_layout Standard
35530 You can specify in the dialog tab
35534 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35539 \begin_inset space ~
35543 \begin_inset space ~
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35552 option allows long links to be split;
35555 \begin_inset space ~
35559 \begin_inset space ~
35563 \begin_inset space ~
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35576 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35584 colors the different links.
35585 The default colors are:
35588 \begin_layout Labeling
35589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35594 for hyperlinks and URLs
35597 \begin_layout Labeling
35598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35606 \begin_layout Labeling
35607 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 but you can change these in the field
35621 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35624 \begin_layout Standard
35627 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35630 \begin_layout Standard
35635 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35636 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35637 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35640 \begin_layout Standard
35645 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35646 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35647 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35657 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35658 when opening the PDF.
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35663 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35664 \begin_inset space ~
35667 1 will only display the sections.
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35671 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35672 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35678 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35679 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35689 \begin_layout Section
35691 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35695 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35702 \begin_layout Subsection
35705 \begin_inset Index idx
35708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35718 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35725 \begin_layout Standard
35726 As \SpecialChar LyX
35727 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35728 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35729 commands and constructs,
35732 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35733 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35734 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35735 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35736 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35737 cannot support all packages and
35741 \begin_layout Standard
35742 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35743 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35744 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35748 Code box is created by the menu
35750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35752 \begin_inset space ~
35757 or by the toolbar button
35770 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35778 \begin_layout Standard
35779 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35781 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35783 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35788 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35793 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35800 , you can write the command part
35806 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35807 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35811 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35812 Code box behind the word.
35813 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35814 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35818 \begin_layout Standard
35819 \begin_inset Graphics
35820 filename clipart/ERT.png
35828 \begin_layout Standard
35832 \begin_layout Standard
35833 This is a line with a
35837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35861 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35869 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35870 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35871 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35872 know that the command is finished.
35880 \begin_layout Subsection
35881 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35883 \begin_inset Argument 1
35886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35887 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35894 \begin_inset Index idx
35897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35907 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35914 \begin_layout Standard
35915 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35916 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35917 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35918 uses in the background.
35919 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35920 is based on commands, you can
35921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35929 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35930 any time if you know the right commands.
35931 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35932 is the end of the day.
35933 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35934 all caption labels bold.
35935 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35937 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35941 \begin_layout Standard
35942 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35944 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35946 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35949 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35959 \begin_layout Standard
35960 As result you find that the package
35965 \begin_inset Index idx
35968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35976 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35978 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35981 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35985 \begin_inset space ~
35993 \begin_layout Standard
35998 usepackage[options]{package name}
36001 \begin_layout Standard
36002 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36003 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36004 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36005 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36008 \begin_layout Standard
36009 In your case the package name is
36014 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36019 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36020 So you add the command
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36028 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36031 \begin_layout Standard
36032 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36037 For more commands provided by the
36041 package, have a look at its documentation,
36042 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36057 \begin_layout Standard
36058 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36060 For example if you use a
36064 class, you don't need the package
36068 , you can instead write
36071 \begin_layout Standard
36076 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36081 \begin_layout Standard
36082 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36083 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36084 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36091 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36094 \begin_layout Standard
36095 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36096 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36098 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36099 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36100 Code box as described in the previous
36104 \begin_layout Standard
36105 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36106 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36109 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36111 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36119 \begin_layout Standard
36120 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36126 \begin_layout Standard
36130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36140 \begin_inset Note Note
36143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36144 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36152 \begin_layout Left Header
36153 \begin_inset Argument 1
36156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36176 \begin_inset Note Note
36179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36180 defines the header line as described below
36188 \begin_layout Center Header
36189 \begin_inset Argument 1
36192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36201 \begin_layout Right Header
36202 \begin_inset Argument 1
36205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36226 \begin_layout Left Footer
36227 \begin_inset Argument 1
36230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36251 \begin_layout Center Footer
36252 \begin_inset Argument 1
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36267 \begin_inset Newline newline
36271 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36277 \begin_layout Right Footer
36278 \begin_inset Argument 1
36281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36303 \begin_layout Section
36304 Customized Page Headers and Footers
36305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36307 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36312 \begin_inset Index idx
36315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36316 Document ! Header/Footer line
36322 \begin_inset Index idx
36325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36334 \begin_layout Standard
36335 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36356 \begin_inset space ~
36362 As a second step add in the menu
36364 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36365 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36374 Custom Header/Footerlines
36377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36381 This module offers the following 6
36382 \begin_inset space ~
36388 \begin_layout Description
36390 \begin_inset space ~
36394 \begin_inset space ~
36398 \begin_inset space ~
36402 \begin_inset space ~
36406 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_layout Description
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36418 \begin_inset space ~
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36436 \begin_layout Standard
36437 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36438 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36441 \begin_layout Standard
36442 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36443 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36445 \begin_inset space ~
36449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36451 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36455 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36458 \begin_layout Standard
36459 \begin_inset Float figure
36466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36469 \begin_inset Tabular
36470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36471 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36472 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36473 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36474 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36494 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36523 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36534 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36538 The normal text on the page goes here.
36539 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36541 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36542 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36547 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36556 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36567 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36585 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36614 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36632 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36637 name "fig:Page-layout"
36641 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36654 \begin_layout Standard
36655 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36663 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36667 \begin_inset space ~
36672 is set to “Default”.
36673 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36682 \begin_layout Subsection
36686 \begin_layout Standard
36687 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36688 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36689 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36690 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36692 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36694 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36697 \begin_layout Standard
36698 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36699 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36705 \begin_inset space ~
36713 \begin_layout Description
36716 thepage prints the current page number
36719 \begin_layout Description
36722 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36725 \begin_layout Description
36728 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36731 \begin_layout Description
36734 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36735 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36742 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36745 because it usually goes in a left header.
36748 \begin_layout Description
36751 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36752 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36754 It is normally used in the right header.
36757 \begin_layout Subsection
36758 Default header/footer
36761 \begin_layout Standard
36762 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36763 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36764 footer has the page number.
36765 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36766 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36767 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36770 \begin_inset space ~
36778 \begin_layout Subsection
36782 \begin_layout Standard
36783 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36784 Some pages are different.
36785 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36786 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36787 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36788 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36789 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36792 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36793 Header and footer decoration line
36796 \begin_layout Standard
36797 By default, you get a 0.4
36798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36801 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36802 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36814 in the following way:
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36824 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36841 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36848 \begin_layout Standard
36849 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36851 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36867 Several header/footer lines
36870 \begin_layout Standard
36871 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36872 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36873 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36875 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36890 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36891 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36893 \begin_inset space ~
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36908 headheight}{height}
36911 \begin_layout Standard
36916 is a size in standard units (e.
36917 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36921 \begin_inset space \space{}
36929 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36930 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36931 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36932 logfile with the menu
36934 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36936 \begin_inset space ~
36944 \begin_inset space ~
36949 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36954 \begin_inset Index idx
36957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36959 packages ! fancyhdr
36965 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36966 for your header/footer.
36969 \begin_layout Subsection
36973 \begin_layout Standard
36974 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36975 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36976 This example consists of the following definition:
36979 \begin_layout Description
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36990 , empty optional argument
36993 \begin_layout Description
36995 \begin_inset space ~
36998 Header empty, empty optional argument
37001 \begin_layout Description
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37012 in the optional argument
37015 \begin_layout Description
37017 \begin_inset space ~
37026 in the optional argument
37029 \begin_layout Description
37031 \begin_inset space ~
37044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37048 \begin_inset Newline newline
37052 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37059 in the optional argument
37062 \begin_layout Description
37064 \begin_inset space ~
37073 , empty optional argument
37076 \begin_layout Description
37079 headrulewidth set to 2
37080 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37086 \begin_layout Standard
37087 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37088 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37094 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37104 \begin_layout Standard
37105 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37111 \begin_layout Standard
37115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37119 pagestyle{headings}
37125 \begin_inset Note Note
37128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37129 switches back to page style with the default headings
37137 \begin_layout Section
37138 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37141 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37146 \begin_inset Index idx
37149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37156 \begin_inset Index idx
37159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37168 \begin_layout Standard
37170 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37171 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37172 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37175 \begin_layout Subsection
37179 \begin_layout Standard
37180 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37186 \begin_inset Index idx
37189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37191 packages ! preview-latex
37196 (on some systems named simply
37201 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37203 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37210 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37212 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37220 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37221 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37222 -package are automatically
37223 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37227 \begin_layout Subsection
37231 \begin_layout Standard
37232 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37233 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37235 activate the option
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37245 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37251 \begin_inset space ~
37255 \begin_inset space ~
37258 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37265 \begin_inset space ~
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37283 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37292 \begin_inset space ~
37300 \begin_inset space ~
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37310 and when you finish
37314 \begin_layout Standard
37315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37323 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
37324 generated by activating the option
37327 \begin_inset space ~
37333 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37341 \begin_layout Subsection
37342 Selected document parts
37345 \begin_layout Standard
37346 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37347 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37348 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
37349 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37351 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
37353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37357 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37358 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37359 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
37362 \begin_layout Standard
37363 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37370 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37382 is explained in section
37384 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37399 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37400 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37401 the final rotated boxes,
37402 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37403 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37405 Here is the result:
37408 \begin_layout Standard
37409 \begin_inset Preview
37411 \begin_layout Standard
37416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37420 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37426 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37436 height_special "totalheight"
37441 backgroundcolor "none"
37444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37469 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37475 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37497 \begin_layout Standard
37498 Previewing works also for colors.
37499 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37518 is explained in section
37525 \begin_inset space ~
37538 \begin_layout Standard
37539 \begin_inset Preview
37541 \begin_layout Standard
37545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37564 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37569 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37588 \begin_layout Standard
37589 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37595 \begin_layout Standard
37596 If \SpecialChar LyX
37597 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37598 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37599 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37600 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37601 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37602 the \SpecialChar TeX
37604 If \SpecialChar LyX
37605 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37606 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37608 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37609 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37610 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37613 \begin_layout Subsection
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37620 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37623 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37625 \begin_inset space ~
37630 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37632 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37634 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37635 's main window, then only this selection
37636 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37637 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37638 the source view window.
37643 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37644 ; but note that if you have
37645 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37647 not just the one which is open at the time.
37650 \begin_layout Section
37651 Advanced Find and Replace
37652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37654 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37659 \begin_inset Index idx
37662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37669 \begin_inset Index idx
37672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37681 \begin_layout Subsection
37685 \begin_layout Standard
37686 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37687 allows for searching of complex,
37688 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37690 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37691 The key-features are:
37694 \begin_layout Itemize
37695 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37696 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37697 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37701 \begin_layout Itemize
37702 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37703 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37704 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37705 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37708 \begin_layout Itemize
37709 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37710 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37711 outside of mathematics environments
37714 \begin_layout Itemize
37715 Search may be widened to a specific
37720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37724 \begin_inset space ~
37727 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37728 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37735 \begin_layout Itemize
37736 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37737 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37742 \begin_inset space ~
37745 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37748 \begin_layout Subsection
37752 \begin_layout Standard
37753 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37755 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37768 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37771 ) or the toolbar button
37774 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37780 Advanced Find and Replace
37785 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37789 \begin_layout Standard
37795 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37799 \begin_inset space ~
37804 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37807 arg "paragraph-break"
37811 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37812 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37816 arg "paragraph-break"
37819 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37823 searches backwards.
37826 \begin_layout Standard
37830 \begin_inset space ~
37835 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37849 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37852 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37853 Searching for mathematics
37856 \begin_layout Standard
37857 Mathematical formulas, such as
37858 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37861 or something more complex like
37862 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37865 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37870 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37871 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37872 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37873 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37879 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37883 \begin_layout Standard
37884 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37885 This is done by switching to the
37889 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37894 This way, entering in the
37901 \begin_layout Itemize
37902 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37903 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37906 \begin_layout Itemize
37907 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37908 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37911 \begin_layout Itemize
37912 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37913 of it only within section headings.
37914 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37915 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37919 \begin_layout Itemize
37920 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37921 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37928 \begin_layout Standard
37929 The entries made in the
37933 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37936 \begin_inset space ~
37942 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37946 button or alternatively press
37949 arg "paragraph-break"
37956 while the cursor is in the
37959 \begin_inset space ~
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37970 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37974 \begin_layout Itemize
37975 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37976 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37984 with its typewriter version
37985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37999 \begin_layout Itemize
38000 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38006 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38018 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38025 (you may want to enable the
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38036 \begin_inset space ~
38041 options and disable the
38049 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38057 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38058 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38062 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38065 , or occurrences of
38066 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38070 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38076 \begin_layout Subsection
38080 \begin_layout Standard
38081 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38086 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38090 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38100 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38106 This is done with the context menu
38108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38109 Insert Regular Expression
38111 while the cursor is in the
38116 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38117 expression matching rules
38121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38122 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38125 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38132 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38133 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38139 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38140 same text in the document.
38141 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38142 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38145 \begin_layout Enumerate
38146 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38151 editor the fraction
38152 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38156 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38159 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38160 fractions with the given denominator.
38163 \begin_layout Enumerate
38164 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
38176 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38181 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38182 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38183 Also, by inserting a
38184 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38187 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38188 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38191 \begin_layout Standard
38192 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38193 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38194 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38197 , and referring back to them through
38198 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38202 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38206 For example, try searching with the regexp
38207 \begin_inset Newline newline
38210 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38213 \begin_inset Newline newline
38216 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
38219 \begin_layout Standard
38220 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38223 \begin_layout Standard
38224 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38232 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
38233 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
38234 sub-expressions is absolute.
38236 \begin_inset space ~
38240 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38243 always refers to the first occurrence of
38244 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38247 in all entered regexps.
38255 \begin_layout Section
38257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38259 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38264 \begin_inset Index idx
38267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38276 \begin_layout Standard
38278 has a built-in spell checker.
38281 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38288 key or the toolbar button
38291 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38294 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
38295 beginning of the currently selected text.
38296 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
38297 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38298 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
38299 scrolled so that it is visible.
38300 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
38301 n, if any could be found.
38302 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38306 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38307 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38310 \begin_layout Standard
38311 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
38314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38318 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
38319 a different one at the top of the dialog.
38321 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38322 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38325 \begin_inset space ~
38333 arg "dialog-show character"
38336 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38338 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38341 \begin_layout Standard
38342 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38343 can be downloaded from here:
38344 \begin_inset Newline newline
38348 \begin_inset Flex URL
38351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38353 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
38355 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38356 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
38357 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
38365 \begin_inset Newline newline
38369 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
38371 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
38372 You should download
38375 \begin_inset space ~
38378 files for each language
38379 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
38384 link at the end of the opened webpage)
38387 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
38388 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
38392 \begin_inset space ~
38395 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38396 's installation subfolder
38404 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38406 \begin_inset Newline newline
38409 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38410 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38411 but in most cases these are
38427 is the language code.
38430 \begin_layout Subsection
38434 \begin_layout Standard
38437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38438 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38440 \begin_inset space ~
38443 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38446 you can set the following things:
38449 \begin_layout Description
38451 \begin_inset space ~
38454 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38455 should use for spell checking.
38456 Depending on your platform,
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38467 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38468 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38483 \begin_inset space ~
38486 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38489 \begin_layout Description
38491 \begin_inset space ~
38494 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38495 will always use the given language
38496 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38499 \begin_layout Description
38501 \begin_inset space ~
38504 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38510 \begin_inset space \space{}
38514 This should normally not be needed.
38517 \begin_layout Description
38519 \begin_inset space ~
38523 \begin_inset space ~
38526 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38538 \begin_layout Description
38540 \begin_inset space ~
38543 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38544 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38545 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38546 appear in a context menu.
38547 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38551 \begin_layout Description
38553 \begin_inset space ~
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38561 \begin_inset space ~
38564 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38568 \begin_layout Section
38570 \begin_inset Index idx
38573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38582 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38589 \begin_layout Standard
38591 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38592 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38602 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38604 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38614 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38616 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38617 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38618 which are available for many languages.
38621 \begin_layout Standard
38622 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38623 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38627 \begin_layout Subsection
38628 Setting up the thesaurus
38631 \begin_layout Standard
38640 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38644 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38649 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38663 For instance, the US English files are named:
38666 \begin_layout Itemize
38670 \begin_layout Itemize
38674 \begin_layout Standard
38683 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38684 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38687 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38688 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38689 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38696 ) to the path where they are installed.
38700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38701 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38702 ies, typical locations are
38708 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38712 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38716 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38719 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38725 LibreOffice-<Version>
38732 On the Mac, the default location is
38734 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38735 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38736 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38737 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38738 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38739 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38747 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38748 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38749 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38753 \begin_layout Standard
38754 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38756 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
38758 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
38761 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
38762 \begin_inset Newline newline
38766 \begin_inset Flex URL
38769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
38773 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38774 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
38775 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
38785 \begin_layout Standard
38786 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38787 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38789 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38790 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38791 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 \begin_inset space ~
38798 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38800 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38801 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38805 \begin_layout Standard
38806 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38808 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38811 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38817 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38820 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38821 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38829 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38830 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38831 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38833 \begin_inset space ~
38838 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38841 \begin_layout Subsection
38842 Using the thesaurus
38845 \begin_layout Standard
38846 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38848 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38851 or the toolbar button
38854 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38857 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38859 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38861 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38862 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38863 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38872 ), related terms (such as
38875 \begin_inset space ~
38884 ), compounds (such as
38887 \begin_inset space ~
38896 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38905 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38908 \begin_layout Standard
38909 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38910 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38914 \begin_layout Standard
38915 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38916 the dictionary, such as the above
38920 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38925 \begin_inset space \space{}
38928 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38929 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38930 For example, looking up the word form
38934 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38939 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38940 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38944 \begin_inset space \space{}
38955 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38956 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38957 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38960 \begin_layout Section
38962 \begin_inset Index idx
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 \begin_inset Index idx
38975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38976 Document ! Change Tracking
38982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38984 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38991 \begin_layout Standard
38992 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38993 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38994 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38995 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39002 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39004 \begin_inset space ~
39012 \begin_layout Standard
39013 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39027 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39028 You can change the color in
39030 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39031 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39037 \begin_inset space ~
39042 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39048 \begin_inset Index idx
39051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39052 Color ! Change tracking
39057 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39058 's status bar when the
39059 cursor is in changed text.
39060 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39063 arg "changes-merge"
39069 \begin_layout Standard
39070 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39072 \begin_inset Index idx
39075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39084 \begin_layout Standard
39085 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39091 \begin_layout Standard
39092 \begin_inset Graphics
39093 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39101 \begin_layout Standard
39102 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39108 \begin_layout Standard
39109 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39112 \begin_layout Standard
39113 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39119 \begin_layout Standard
39120 \begin_inset Tabular
39121 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39122 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39123 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39124 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39125 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39134 arg "changes-track"
39142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39150 \begin_inset space ~
39153 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39155 \begin_inset space ~
39164 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39173 arg "changes-output"
39181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39189 \begin_inset space ~
39192 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39194 \begin_inset space ~
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39202 \begin_inset space ~
39211 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 Jumps to the next change
39238 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39247 arg "change-accept"
39255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39266 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39268 \begin_inset space ~
39277 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39286 arg "change-reject"
39294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39300 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39302 \begin_inset space ~
39305 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39307 \begin_inset space ~
39316 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39325 arg "changes-merge"
39333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39339 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39341 \begin_inset space ~
39344 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39364 arg "all-changes-accept"
39372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39380 \begin_inset space ~
39383 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39389 \begin_inset space ~
39398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39407 arg "all-changes-reject"
39415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39421 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39426 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39428 \begin_inset space ~
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39464 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39465 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39467 \begin_inset space ~
39476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39499 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39501 \begin_inset space ~
39517 \begin_layout Standard
39518 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39524 \begin_layout Standard
39525 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39545 \begin_layout Standard
39546 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39547 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39548 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39549 the next change after the current cursor position.
39550 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39551 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39552 step to the next change.
39553 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39556 \begin_layout Standard
39557 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39558 to describe a change.
39561 \begin_layout Standard
39563 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39564 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39570 \begin_inset Index idx
39573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39583 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39590 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39596 \begin_layout Section
39597 Comparison of Documents
39598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39600 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39605 \begin_inset Index idx
39608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 Comparison of documents
39617 \begin_layout Standard
39618 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39621 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39625 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39626 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39628 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39630 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39638 \begin_inset space ~
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39651 \begin_inset space ~
39655 \begin_inset space ~
39659 \begin_inset space ~
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39667 \begin_inset space ~
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39676 enables the change tracking option
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39683 \begin_inset space ~
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39692 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39695 \begin_layout Section
39696 International Support
39697 \begin_inset Index idx
39700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39701 International support
39709 \begin_layout Standard
39710 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39711 with any language you want.
39712 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39713 up \SpecialChar LyX
39715 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39717 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39727 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39728 \begin_inset space ~
39732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39734 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39741 \begin_layout Subsection
39743 \begin_inset Index idx
39746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39753 \begin_inset Index idx
39756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39757 Document ! Settings
39763 \begin_inset Index idx
39766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39767 Document ! Language
39775 \begin_layout Standard
39778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39782 dialog lets you set
39784 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39789 \begin_layout Standard
39794 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39799 \begin_inset space ~
39804 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39805 For details about the different encoding options see section
39806 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39812 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39819 \begin_layout Subsection
39820 Keyboard mapping configuration
39821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39823 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39830 \begin_layout Standard
39831 If you have for example a U.
39832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39835 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39836 can use an alternate keymap.
39837 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39842 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39843 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39844 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39847 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39848 \begin_inset space ~
39852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39854 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39859 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39860 which one you want to use.
39863 \begin_layout Standard
39864 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39865 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39866 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39870 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39871 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39872 one to support the characters you want.
39873 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39880 \begin_layout Chapter
39883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39885 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39892 \begin_layout Standard
39893 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39894 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39895 topic inside the user's guide.
39898 \begin_layout Section
39900 \begin_inset Index idx
39903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39912 \begin_layout Standard
39917 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39920 \begin_layout Subsection
39924 \begin_layout Standard
39925 Creates a new document.
39928 \begin_layout Subsection
39932 \begin_layout Standard
39933 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39934 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39935 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39937 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39938 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39944 \begin_layout Subsection
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39952 \begin_layout Subsection
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39957 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39958 Click there on a file to open it.
39961 \begin_layout Subsection
39963 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39967 \begin_layout Standard
39969 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39970 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39974 \begin_layout Subsection
39978 \begin_layout Standard
39979 Closes the current document.
39982 \begin_layout Subsection
39986 \begin_layout Standard
39987 Closes all opened documents.
39990 \begin_layout Subsection
39994 \begin_layout Standard
39995 Saves the actual document.
39998 \begin_layout Subsection
40002 \begin_layout Standard
40003 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40004 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40008 \begin_layout Subsection
40010 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40014 \begin_layout Standard
40016 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40017 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40023 \begin_layout Subsection
40027 \begin_layout Standard
40028 Saves all opened documents.
40031 \begin_layout Subsection
40035 \begin_layout Standard
40036 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40039 \begin_layout Subsection
40043 \begin_layout Standard
40044 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40045 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40046 It is described in the section
40048 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40053 Additional Features
40058 \begin_layout Subsection
40062 \begin_layout Standard
40063 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40064 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40066 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40067 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40071 \begin_layout Standard
40072 When using the menu entry
40075 \begin_inset space ~
40080 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40084 \begin_inset space ~
40088 \begin_inset space ~
40092 \begin_inset space ~
40097 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40098 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40101 \begin_layout Subsection
40103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40105 name "subsec:Export"
40112 \begin_layout Standard
40113 You can export your document to various file formats.
40114 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40116 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40117 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40118 during its configuration.
40121 \begin_layout Standard
40122 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40130 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40137 \begin_layout Description
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40146 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40148 \begin_inset space ~
40151 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40152 \begin_inset Newline newline
40155 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40156 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40160 \begin_layout Description
40161 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
40167 \begin_layout Description
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40172 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
40178 \begin_layout Description
40179 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40180 's native DVI-format.
40181 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
40182 files paths or file names in your document.
40184 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40191 \begin_layout Description
40192 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
40193 in files paths or file names
40196 \begin_layout Description
40198 \begin_inset space ~
40205 ) DVI-format using the program
40207 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40210 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40222 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40230 \begin_layout Description
40232 \begin_inset space ~
40235 (cropped) the same as
40239 but with cropped page margins.
40242 \begin_layout Description
40244 \begin_inset space ~
40247 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40251 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40256 \begin_layout Description
40260 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40268 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40276 \begin_layout Description
40278 \begin_inset space ~
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40285 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40289 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
40297 \begin_layout Description
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40310 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40311 source that is compilable with the program
40313 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40317 \begin_layout Description
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40326 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40327 source, additionally all images used in the document
40328 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40332 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
40335 \begin_layout Description
40339 \begin_inset space ~
40344 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40345 source code, additionally all images used in the document
40346 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
40354 \begin_layout Description
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40367 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40368 source that is compilable with the program
40374 \begin_layout Description
40376 \begin_inset space ~
40380 \begin_inset space ~
40387 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40388 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
40394 \begin_layout Description
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40399 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
40400 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
40402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40406 \begin_inset space \space{}
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40430 represent the version number)
40433 \begin_layout Description
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset space ~
40442 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40443 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40444 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40448 \begin_layout Description
40449 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40450 's internal XHTML engine
40453 \begin_layout Description
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset space ~
40463 \begin_inset space ~
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40470 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40475 For the conversion the program
40484 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40487 \begin_layout Description
40488 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40493 \begin_layout Description
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40498 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40500 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40503 For the conversion the program
40512 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40515 \begin_layout Description
40517 \begin_inset space ~
40520 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40521 For the conversion the program
40530 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40533 \begin_layout Description
40535 \begin_inset space ~
40538 (cropped) the same as
40541 \begin_inset space ~
40546 but with cropped page margins
40549 \begin_layout Description
40553 \begin_inset space ~
40558 PDF-format using the program
40562 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40565 \begin_layout Description
40569 \begin_inset space ~
40573 \begin_inset space ~
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40586 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40587 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40591 \begin_inset space \space{}
40594 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40598 \begin_layout Description
40602 \begin_inset space ~
40607 PDF-format using the program
40609 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40612 , produces PDF-files directly
40615 \begin_layout Description
40619 \begin_inset space ~
40624 PDF-format using the program
40628 , produces PDF-files directly
40631 \begin_layout Description
40635 \begin_inset space ~
40640 PDF-format using the program
40644 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40647 \begin_layout Description
40651 \begin_inset space ~
40656 PDF-format using the program
40661 , produces PDF-files directly
40664 \begin_layout Description
40668 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_layout Description
40680 \begin_inset space ~
40684 \begin_inset space ~
40689 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40690 and then exported as text using the program
40695 \begin_layout Description
40700 PostScript format using the program
40708 options see section
40709 \begin_inset space ~
40713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40715 reference "subsec:General-output"
40722 \begin_layout Description
40723 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40724 source and also code in the statistical programming
40738 it is possible to use
40742 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40746 \begin_layout Standard
40747 If one of the menu entries
40754 \begin_inset space ~
40763 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40765 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40767 \begin_inset space ~
40771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40773 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40778 \begin_inset Index idx
40781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40782 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40791 \begin_layout Subsection
40795 \begin_layout Standard
40796 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40797 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40800 \begin_inset space ~
40804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40806 reference "sec:Paths"
40811 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40820 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40821 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40822 's preferences as described in section
40823 \begin_inset space ~
40827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40829 reference "subsec:Converters"
40836 \begin_layout Subsection
40837 New and Close Window
40840 \begin_layout Standard
40841 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40845 \begin_layout Subsection
40849 \begin_layout Standard
40850 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40853 \begin_layout Section
40855 \begin_inset Index idx
40858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40867 \begin_layout Subsection
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 Described in section
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40886 \begin_layout Subsection
40887 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40890 \begin_layout Standard
40891 Described in section
40892 \begin_inset space ~
40896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40898 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40905 \begin_layout Subsection
40909 \begin_layout Standard
40910 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40911 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40914 \begin_layout Subsection
40918 \begin_layout Standard
40919 Selects the whole document.
40922 \begin_layout Subsection
40923 Find & Replace (Quick)
40926 \begin_layout Standard
40927 Described in section
40928 \begin_inset space ~
40932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40934 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40941 \begin_layout Subsection
40942 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 Described in section
40947 \begin_inset space ~
40951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40953 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40960 \begin_layout Subsection
40961 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40964 \begin_layout Standard
40965 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40969 \begin_layout Subsection
40971 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40975 \begin_layout Standard
40977 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40978 Described in section
40979 \begin_inset space ~
40983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40985 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40994 \begin_layout Subsection
40996 \begin_inset Index idx
40999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41000 Paragraph ! Settings
41008 \begin_layout Standard
41009 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41010 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41014 \begin_layout Standard
41015 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41016 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41023 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41035 \begin_layout Subsection
41037 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41041 \begin_layout Standard
41043 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41044 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41049 \begin_layout Enumerate
41051 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41052 Customize text properties by means of the
41058 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41061 ; this is described in section
41062 \begin_inset space ~
41066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41068 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41075 \begin_layout Enumerate
41077 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41078 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41080 Apply last settings
41083 \begin_layout Enumerate
41085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41086 Change the casing of selected text (
41101 \begin_layout Subsection
41103 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41107 \begin_layout Standard
41109 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41110 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
41111 text styles (in the case of this document:
41133 \begin_inset space ~
41137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41139 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41148 \begin_layout Subsection
41149 Table and Rows & Columns
41152 \begin_layout Standard
41153 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41154 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41155 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41158 \begin_layout Subsection
41162 \begin_layout Standard
41163 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41164 It will dissolve this inset.
41165 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
41169 \begin_layout Subsection
41173 \begin_layout Standard
41174 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41175 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41178 \begin_layout Subsection
41179 Increase/Decrease List Depth
41182 \begin_layout Standard
41183 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
41185 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41186 \begin_inset space ~
41190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41192 reference "sec:Nesting"
41197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41199 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41206 \begin_layout Section
41208 \begin_inset Index idx
41211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41220 \begin_layout Standard
41221 At the bottom of the
41225 menu the opened documents are listed.
41228 \begin_layout Subsection
41229 Open/Close all Insets
41232 \begin_layout Standard
41233 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41236 \begin_layout Subsection
41237 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
41240 \begin_layout Standard
41241 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41244 \begin_layout Standard
41245 Math macros are described in the
41252 \begin_layout Subsection
41256 \begin_layout Standard
41257 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41264 reference "sec:Navigating"
41269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41271 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41278 \begin_layout Subsection
41282 \begin_layout Standard
41283 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
41285 \begin_inset space ~
41289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41291 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41298 \begin_layout Subsection
41302 \begin_layout Standard
41303 Opens a window showing console messages.
41304 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41309 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
41310 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41311 is processing the document.
41314 \begin_layout Subsection
41316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41318 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41323 \begin_inset Index idx
41326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41335 \begin_layout Standard
41336 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
41338 All toolbars and the
41341 \begin_inset space ~
41359 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
41361 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
41363 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
41367 \begin_layout Standard
41369 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
41373 \begin_inset space ~
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41408 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
41411 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
41415 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
41417 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
41431 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
41432 denoted in the menu with the suffix
41441 \begin_layout Standard
41446 state the toolbar is permanently shown
41447 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
41452 state it is never shown
41458 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
41459 or when a certain feature is enabled.
41460 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
41461 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
41462 is inside a formula or table respectively
41463 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
41464 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
41469 \begin_layout Standard
41471 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41478 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41485 \begin_layout Subsection
41489 \begin_layout Standard
41493 \begin_inset space ~
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41505 \begin_inset space ~
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41518 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41519 's main window vertically while
41522 \begin_inset space ~
41526 \begin_inset space ~
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41534 \begin_inset space ~
41538 \begin_inset space ~
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41547 will split it horizontally.
41548 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41549 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41550 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41551 three or more documents at the same time.
41552 To close a split view, use the menu
41555 \begin_inset space ~
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41567 \begin_layout Subsection
41571 \begin_layout Standard
41572 Closes a split view.
41575 \begin_layout Subsection
41579 \begin_layout Standard
41580 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41581 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41582 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41583 's main window fullscreen.
41584 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41585 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41588 \begin_layout Section
41590 \begin_inset Index idx
41593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41602 \begin_layout Subsection
41606 \begin_layout Standard
41607 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41614 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41625 \begin_layout Subsection
41627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41629 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41636 \begin_layout Standard
41637 Here you can insert the following characters:
41640 \begin_layout Description
41645 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41648 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41649 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41650 -packages you have installed.
41651 You can get a complete display by checking
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset Newline newline
41664 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41672 Not all characters will be visible in the
41676 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41677 dialog (see section
41678 \begin_inset space ~
41682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41684 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41688 ) can display every character.
41696 \begin_layout Description
41697 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41701 \begin_layout Description
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_inset space ~
41710 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41717 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41724 \begin_layout Description
41726 \begin_inset space ~
41729 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41739 \begin_layout Description
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41744 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41748 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41754 \begin_layout Description
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41759 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41763 \begin_layout Description
41765 \begin_inset space ~
41768 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41772 \begin_layout Description
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41778 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41779 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41785 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41790 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41796 \begin_inset space \space{}
41799 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41800 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41809 To insert a fraction use the command
41814 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41818 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41827 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41834 \begin_layout Description
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41839 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41843 \begin_layout Description
41845 \begin_inset space ~
41849 \begin_inset Index idx
41852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41859 \begin_inset Index idx
41862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41863 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41868 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41869 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41871 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41877 \begin_inset Index idx
41880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41888 \begin_inset Newline newline
41891 More information about this feature can be found in the
41897 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41903 \begin_layout Description
41904 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41906 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41907 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41911 \begin_layout Subsection
41915 \begin_layout Standard
41916 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41919 \begin_layout Description
41920 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41921 \begin_inset script superscript
41923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41932 \begin_layout Description
41933 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41934 \begin_inset script subscript
41936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41945 \begin_layout Description
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41950 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41951 \begin_inset space ~
41955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41957 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41964 \begin_layout Description
41966 \begin_inset space ~
41969 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41976 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41983 \begin_layout Description
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41988 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41989 \begin_inset space ~
41993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41995 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42002 \begin_layout Description
42004 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42009 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42015 \begin_inset space \space{}
42018 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42019 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42028 To insert a fraction use the command
42033 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42037 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42046 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42055 \begin_layout Description
42057 \begin_inset space ~
42060 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42067 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42074 \begin_layout Description
42076 \begin_inset space ~
42079 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42080 \begin_inset space ~
42084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42086 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42093 \begin_layout Description
42095 \begin_inset space ~
42098 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42099 \begin_inset space ~
42103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42105 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42112 \begin_layout Description
42113 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42114 \begin_inset space ~
42118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42120 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42127 \begin_layout Description
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42132 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42133 \begin_inset space ~
42137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42139 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42146 \begin_layout Description
42148 \begin_inset space ~
42151 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42152 \begin_inset space ~
42156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42158 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42165 \begin_layout Description
42167 \begin_inset space ~
42171 \begin_inset space ~
42174 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
42177 \begin_inset space ~
42181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42183 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42190 for a usage example.
42193 \begin_layout Description
42195 \begin_inset space ~
42199 \begin_inset space ~
42202 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42203 \begin_inset space ~
42207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42209 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42216 \begin_layout Description
42218 \begin_inset space ~
42221 Break Inserts a forced line break that
42222 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
42225 justifies the remaining text as described in section
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42232 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42239 \begin_layout Description
42241 \begin_inset space ~
42244 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42251 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42258 \begin_layout Description
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42263 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
42264 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42272 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42277 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
42281 \begin_layout Description
42283 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42289 \begin_inset space ~
42292 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
42293 to prevent a page break at the given position.
42295 \begin_inset space ~
42299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42301 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
42310 \begin_layout Description
42312 \begin_inset space ~
42315 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42316 \begin_inset space ~
42320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42322 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42329 \begin_layout Description
42331 \begin_inset space ~
42335 \begin_inset space ~
42338 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42345 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42352 \begin_layout Subsection
42354 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
42358 \begin_layout Standard
42360 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
42361 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
42362 The submenu allows you to insert
42365 \begin_layout Description
42367 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42372 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
42375 \begin_layout Description
42377 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42383 \begin_inset space ~
42386 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
42390 \begin_layout Description
42392 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
42394 \begin_inset space ~
42397 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
42400 \begin_layout Description
42402 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
42404 \begin_inset space ~
42407 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
42410 \begin_layout Description
42412 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
42414 \begin_inset space ~
42418 \begin_inset space ~
42421 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
42425 \begin_layout Description
42427 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
42429 \begin_inset space ~
42432 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
42435 \begin_layout Description
42437 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
42439 \begin_inset space ~
42443 \begin_inset space ~
42447 \begin_inset space ~
42450 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
42453 \begin_layout Description
42455 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
42457 \begin_inset space ~
42460 Name inserts the user name as specified in
42462 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42463 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42469 \begin_layout Description
42471 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
42473 \begin_inset space ~
42476 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
42478 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42479 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42485 \begin_layout Description
42487 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
42488 Other\SpecialChar ldots
42489 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
42490 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
42493 \begin_layout Subsection
42496 List/Contents/References
42499 \begin_layout Standard
42500 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42504 \begin_inset space ~
42525 are described in section
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42532 reference "sec:toc"
42541 is described in section
42542 \begin_inset space ~
42546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42548 reference "sec:Index"
42556 is described in section
42557 \begin_inset space ~
42561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42563 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42569 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42572 is described in section
42573 \begin_inset space ~
42577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42579 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42586 \begin_layout Subsection
42590 \begin_layout Standard
42591 To insert floats, as described in section
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42598 reference "sec:Floats"
42602 and in detail the chapter
42609 \begin_inset space ~
42617 \begin_layout Subsection
42621 \begin_layout Standard
42622 To insert notes, described in section
42623 \begin_inset space ~
42627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42629 reference "sec:Notes"
42636 \begin_layout Subsection
42640 \begin_layout Standard
42641 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42643 Branches are described in section
42644 \begin_inset space ~
42648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42650 reference "sec:Branches"
42657 \begin_layout Subsection
42661 \begin_layout Standard
42662 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42663 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42665 An example is the document class
42666 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42676 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42685 with three custom insets.
42688 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42692 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42698 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42701 \begin_layout Subsection
42703 \begin_inset Index idx
42706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42715 \begin_layout Standard
42716 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42718 For more information see chapter
42720 External Document Parts
42723 \begin_inset space ~
42729 \begin_layout Subsection
42731 \begin_inset Index idx
42734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42743 \begin_layout Standard
42744 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42745 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42752 \begin_inset space ~
42760 \begin_layout Subsection
42764 \begin_layout Standard
42769 dialog as described in section
42770 \begin_inset space ~
42774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42776 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42783 \begin_layout Subsection
42787 \begin_layout Standard
42792 as described in section
42793 \begin_inset space ~
42797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42799 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42806 \begin_layout Subsection
42810 \begin_layout Standard
42815 as described in section
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42822 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42829 \begin_layout Subsection
42831 \begin_inset Index idx
42834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42841 \begin_inset Index idx
42844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42845 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42853 \begin_layout Standard
42854 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42855 Floats are described in section
42856 \begin_inset space ~
42860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42862 reference "sec:Floats"
42866 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42869 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42877 \begin_inset space ~
42885 \begin_layout Subsection
42889 \begin_layout Standard
42890 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42891 \begin_inset space ~
42895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42897 reference "sec:Index"
42904 \begin_layout Subsection
42908 \begin_layout Standard
42909 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42910 \begin_inset space ~
42914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42916 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42923 \begin_layout Subsection
42927 \begin_layout Standard
42928 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42929 Tables are described in section
42930 \begin_inset space ~
42934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42936 reference "sec:Tables"
42940 and in detail in the chapter
42947 \begin_inset space ~
42955 \begin_layout Subsection
42959 \begin_layout Standard
42965 Graphics are described in section
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42972 reference "sec:Graphics"
42979 \begin_layout Subsection
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42984 Inserts a URL as described in section
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42991 reference "subsec:URLs"
42998 \begin_layout Subsection
43002 \begin_layout Standard
43003 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43010 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43017 \begin_layout Subsection
43021 \begin_layout Standard
43022 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43029 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43036 \begin_layout Subsection
43040 \begin_layout Standard
43041 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43048 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43055 \begin_layout Subsection
43058 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43061 \begin_layout Standard
43062 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43063 environments of the same type.
43065 \begin_inset space ~
43069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43071 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43075 for an explanation.
43078 \begin_layout Subsection
43082 \begin_layout Standard
43083 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43084 title or caption of a float.
43085 Inserts a short title as described in section
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43092 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43099 \begin_layout Subsection
43104 \begin_layout Standard
43105 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43106 Code box as described in section
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43113 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43120 \begin_layout Subsection
43122 \begin_inset Index idx
43125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43134 \begin_layout Standard
43135 Inserts a program listings box.
43136 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43138 Program Code Listings
43143 \begin_inset space ~
43151 \begin_layout Subsection
43153 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43157 \begin_layout Standard
43159 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
43160 Inserts the actual date.
43161 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
43168 \begin_layout Subsection
43172 \begin_layout Standard
43173 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43174 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43180 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43187 \begin_layout Section
43189 \begin_inset Index idx
43192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43201 \begin_layout Standard
43202 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43206 of the current document.
43207 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43210 \begin_layout Subsection
43214 \begin_layout Standard
43215 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43216 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
43217 to jump, for example, between section
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43222 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43226 2.5 and use the submenu
43229 \begin_inset space ~
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43240 \begin_inset space ~
43246 \begin_inset space ~
43250 \begin_inset space ~
43256 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
43260 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43266 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43269 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43272 \begin_layout Standard
43274 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
43275 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43281 \begin_inset space ~
43286 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43289 \begin_inset space ~
43294 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43297 \begin_layout Subsection
43298 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
43306 \begin_layout Subsection
43310 \begin_layout Standard
43311 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43312 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43313 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43317 \begin_inset space ~
43321 \begin_inset space ~
43329 \begin_layout Subsection
43333 \begin_layout Standard
43334 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43337 The \SpecialChar LyX
43338 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43340 \begin_inset space ~
43348 \begin_inset space ~
43353 manual for a detailed description.
43356 \begin_layout Section
43358 \begin_inset Index idx
43361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43370 \begin_layout Subsection
43374 \begin_layout Standard
43375 Change Tracking is described in section
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43382 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43389 \begin_layout Subsection
43397 \begin_layout Standard
43398 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43399 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
43400 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43402 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
43403 to the clipboard or update the view.
43404 \begin_inset Newline newline
43407 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43411 \begin_layout Standard
43414 Open Containing Directory
43416 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
43417 's temporary folder for the document.
43418 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
43419 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
43420 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
43421 For example some journals require to send the
43425 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43429 \begin_layout Subsection
43430 Start Appendix Here
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43434 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
43435 as described in section
43436 \begin_inset space ~
43440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43442 reference "sec:Appendices"
43449 \begin_layout Subsection
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_layout Standard
43458 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
43459 default output format for the document (menu
43461 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43462 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43463 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset space ~
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43481 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43485 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
43488 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43489 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43494 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43499 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43511 \begin_inset space ~
43515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43517 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43521 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43522 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43524 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43525 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43530 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43532 \begin_inset space ~
43535 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43545 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43550 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43551 when it is first configured.
43552 The default output format is
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43563 \begin_layout Subsection
43564 View (Other Formats)
43567 \begin_layout Standard
43568 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43569 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43570 actual document with an external program.
43571 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43572 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43573 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43575 All possible formats are listed in section
43576 \begin_inset space ~
43580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43582 reference "subsec:Export"
43587 You should at least see the menu entry
43592 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43594 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43596 \begin_inset space ~
43600 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43602 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43607 \begin_inset Index idx
43610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43611 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43620 \begin_layout Standard
43621 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43622 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43624 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43625 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43630 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43632 \begin_inset space ~
43635 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43639 \begin_inset space ~
43643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43645 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43650 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43651 when it is first configured.
43654 \begin_layout Subsection
43656 \begin_inset space ~
43662 \begin_layout Standard
43663 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43664 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43667 \begin_layout Subsection
43668 Update (Other Formats)
43671 \begin_layout Standard
43672 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43673 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43676 \begin_layout Subsection
43677 View Master Document
43680 \begin_layout Standard
43681 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43702 manual for more information on this topic).
43703 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43704 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43708 \begin_inset space ~
43712 \begin_inset space ~
43717 generates the output of the whole book, while
43721 will just output the chapter alone.
43724 \begin_layout Standard
43725 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43726 in the document settings (menu
43728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43730 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43736 \begin_inset space ~
43742 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43748 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43752 ) or in the preferences (menu
43754 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43755 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43757 \begin_inset space ~
43760 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43762 \begin_inset space ~
43765 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43783 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43790 \begin_layout Subsection
43791 Update Master Document
43794 \begin_layout Standard
43795 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43811 \begin_inset space ~
43816 manual for more information on this topic).
43817 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43818 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43821 \begin_layout Standard
43822 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43823 in the document settings (menu
43825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43826 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43827 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43829 \begin_inset space ~
43833 \begin_inset space ~
43839 \begin_inset space ~
43843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43845 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43849 ) or in the preferences (menu
43851 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43852 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43854 \begin_inset space ~
43857 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43859 \begin_inset space ~
43862 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43880 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43887 \begin_layout Subsection
43889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43891 name "subsec:Compressed"
43898 \begin_layout Standard
43899 Un/compresses the current document.
43900 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43901 compression (see the
43903 Additional Features
43905 manual for details).
43908 \begin_layout Subsection
43912 \begin_layout Standard
43913 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43916 \begin_layout Subsection
43920 \begin_layout Standard
43921 The document settings are described in appendix
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43928 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43935 \begin_layout Section
43937 \begin_inset Index idx
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43949 \begin_layout Subsection
43953 \begin_layout Standard
43954 Spell checking is explained in section
43955 \begin_inset space ~
43959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43961 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43968 \begin_layout Subsection
43972 \begin_layout Standard
43973 The thesaurus is described in section
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43980 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43987 \begin_layout Subsection
43989 \begin_inset Index idx
43992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43999 \begin_inset Index idx
44002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 \begin_layout Standard
44012 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44013 the highlighted document part.
44016 \begin_layout Subsection
44022 \begin_inset Index idx
44025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44035 \begin_layout Standard
44036 Generates with the help of the program
44038 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44041 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44042 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44043 This feature is not available on Windows.
44046 \begin_layout Subsection
44052 \begin_inset Index idx
44055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44065 \begin_layout Standard
44066 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44076 to see the full filename paths.
44079 \begin_layout Subsection
44081 \begin_inset Index idx
44084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 \begin_layout Standard
44094 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44095 files as described in section
44096 \begin_inset space ~
44100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44102 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44109 \begin_layout Subsection
44111 \begin_inset Index idx
44114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 \begin_inset Index idx
44148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44149 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44158 \begin_layout Standard
44159 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44160 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
44161 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44162 -packages and programs it needs; see
44164 \begin_inset space ~
44168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44170 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44177 \begin_layout Subsection
44181 \begin_layout Standard
44186 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44187 \begin_inset space ~
44191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44193 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44200 \begin_layout Section
44202 \begin_inset Index idx
44205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 \begin_layout Standard
44215 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44216 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44218 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
44222 \begin_layout Standard
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44231 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44232 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44233 packages and classes found
44234 by \SpecialChar LyX
44236 \begin_inset space ~
44240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44242 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44249 \begin_layout Standard
44253 \begin_inset space ~
44258 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44263 \begin_layout Section
44265 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44267 name "sec:Toolbars"
44274 \begin_layout Standard
44275 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44282 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44289 \begin_layout Standard
44290 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44291 This is described in the
44293 Additional Features
44298 \begin_layout Subsection
44300 \begin_inset Index idx
44303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 \begin_layout Standard
44313 \begin_inset Graphics
44314 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44322 \begin_layout Standard
44323 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44329 \begin_layout Standard
44330 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 \begin_inset Note Note
44350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
44356 manual for more information.
44364 \begin_layout Standard
44365 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44371 \begin_layout Standard
44372 \begin_inset Tabular
44373 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
44374 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44376 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
44378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44382 \begin_inset Graphics
44383 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
44393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44397 pull-down box for the environments
44410 \begin_layout Standard
44411 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
44417 \begin_layout Standard
44419 \begin_inset Tabular
44420 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
44421 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44422 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44423 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44447 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44454 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44477 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44484 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44507 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44537 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 arg "spelling-continuously"
44561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44565 Spellcheck continuously
44571 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44594 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44631 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44661 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44684 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44714 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44716 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44721 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44730 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44739 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44747 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44753 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44772 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44779 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44821 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44835 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44836 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44864 Emphasize text, function of the
44865 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44870 \begin_inset space ~
44873 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44881 arg "dialog-show character"
44892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44913 Set text to noun style, function of the
44914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44917 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44919 \begin_inset space ~
44922 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44924 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44930 arg "dialog-show character"
44941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44947 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44950 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44963 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44966 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44979 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44984 arg "textstyle-apply"
44994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44999 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
45000 Format text using the current settings in the
45002 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45004 \begin_inset space ~
45007 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45018 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45042 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45044 \begin_inset space ~
45053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45062 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45076 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45083 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45090 arg "tabular-insert"
45098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45117 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45120 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45133 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
45136 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45143 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45152 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45164 Toggle outline window on/off,
45166 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45173 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45182 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45194 Toggle math toolbar on/off
45200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45209 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45221 Toggle table toolbar on/off
45234 \begin_layout Subsection
45236 \begin_inset Index idx
45239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45248 \begin_layout Standard
45249 \begin_inset Graphics
45250 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45258 \begin_layout Standard
45259 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45266 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45270 \begin_layout Standard
45271 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45277 \begin_layout Standard
45278 \begin_inset Tabular
45279 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
45280 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45281 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45282 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45319 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45346 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45373 arg "layout-toggle List"
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45400 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45427 arg "depth-increment"
45435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45441 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45443 \begin_inset space ~
45447 \begin_inset space ~
45456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45465 arg "depth-decrement"
45473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45485 \begin_inset space ~
45494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 arg "float-insert figure"
45511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45517 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45518 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45525 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45534 arg "float-insert table"
45542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45549 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45579 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45625 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45669 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45671 \begin_inset space ~
45680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45689 arg "nomencl-insert"
45697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45723 arg "footnote-insert"
45731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45737 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45744 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45753 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45769 \begin_inset space ~
45778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45802 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45804 \begin_inset space ~
45813 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45822 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45843 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45898 \begin_inset space ~
45907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45930 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45931 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45938 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45947 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45961 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45962 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45964 \begin_inset space ~
45973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45982 arg "dialog-show character"
45990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46001 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46008 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46014 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46019 arg "textstyle-apply"
46027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46032 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46033 Format text using the recent settings in the
46036 arg "dialog-show character"
46045 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46054 arg "layout-paragraph"
46062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46068 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46070 \begin_inset space ~
46079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46102 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46116 \begin_layout Subsection
46117 View/Update Toolbar
46118 \begin_inset Index idx
46121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46122 Toolbar ! View / Update
46130 \begin_layout Standard
46131 \begin_inset Graphics
46132 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46139 \begin_layout Standard
46140 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46146 \begin_layout Standard
46147 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46151 \begin_layout Standard
46152 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46158 \begin_layout Standard
46159 \begin_inset Tabular
46160 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46161 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46162 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46163 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46164 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 arg "buffer-update"
46211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46233 arg "master-buffer-view"
46241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46247 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46249 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
46251 \begin_inset space ~
46257 \begin_inset space ~
46266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46275 arg "master-buffer-update"
46283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46289 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46291 \begin_inset space ~
46295 \begin_inset space ~
46304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46313 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46330 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
46332 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
46335 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46336 Synchronize with Output
46342 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46353 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
46363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46370 View (Other Formats)
46376 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46383 arg "update-others"
46387 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
46395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46402 Update (Other Formats)
46415 \begin_layout Standard
46417 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
46418 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
46424 \begin_layout Subsection
46428 \begin_layout Standard
46429 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46430 \begin_inset space ~
46434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46436 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46440 , the table toolbar
46441 \begin_inset Index idx
46444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46453 \begin_inset space ~
46458 manual and the math macro toolbar
46459 \begin_inset Index idx
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46475 \begin_layout Chapter
46476 The Document Settings
46477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46479 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
46484 \begin_inset Index idx
46487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46488 Document ! Settings
46496 \begin_layout Standard
46500 \begin_inset space ~
46505 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
46506 is called with the menu
46508 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46512 You can save your document settings as default with the
46514 Save as Document Defaults
46516 button in any dialog.
46517 This will create a template named
46521 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46522 when you create a new document without
46526 \begin_layout Standard
46531 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46532 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46535 \begin_layout Standard
46536 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46537 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46538 to find the one you are looking for.
46539 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46540 the submenus of the dialog.
46542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46546 \begin_inset space \space{}
46550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46557 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46558 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46559 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46562 \begin_layout Section
46566 \begin_layout Standard
46567 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46569 Document classes are described in section
46570 \begin_inset space ~
46574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46576 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46583 \begin_layout Standard
46587 \begin_inset space ~
46592 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46597 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46598 as a layout for a document class.
46599 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46601 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46610 \begin_layout Standard
46611 Some classes use special class options by default.
46612 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46616 and you can decide to use them or not.
46617 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46618 recommended you leave them untouched.
46623 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46624 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46629 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46631 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46637 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46638 \begin_inset Newline newline
46643 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46646 \begin_inset Newline newline
46649 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46650 distribution, see section
46655 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46657 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46670 \begin_layout Standard
46675 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46676 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46677 in the background if the child document
46678 is opened without its master.
46679 This way child documents are always compilable.
46680 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46695 \begin_layout Standard
46696 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46707 \begin_inset Index idx
46710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46712 packages ! prettyref
46718 \begin_inset Index idx
46721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46723 packages ! refstyle
46728 for cross-references, see section
46729 \begin_inset space ~
46733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46735 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46742 \begin_layout Section
46746 \begin_layout Standard
46747 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46748 Please refer to the section
46751 \begin_inset space ~
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46764 manual for details.
46767 \begin_layout Section
46771 \begin_layout Standard
46772 Modules are explained in section
46773 \begin_inset space ~
46777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46779 reference "subsec:Modules"
46786 \begin_layout Section
46790 \begin_layout Standard
46792 \begin_inset space ~
46796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46798 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46805 \begin_layout Section
46809 \begin_layout Standard
46810 The document font settings are described in section
46811 \begin_inset space ~
46815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46817 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46824 \begin_layout Section
46828 \begin_layout Standard
46829 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46846 and whether it should be a
46849 \begin_inset space ~
46854 can also be specified here.
46857 \begin_layout Standard
46858 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46859 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46860 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46862 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46865 \begin_layout Standard
46868 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46871 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46872 justifies the text on screen.
46873 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46875 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46879 \begin_layout Standard
46881 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46890 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46895 \begin_layout Section
46899 \begin_layout Standard
46900 This dialog is described in sections
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46907 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46914 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46921 \begin_layout Section
46925 \begin_layout Standard
46926 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46927 \begin_inset space ~
46931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46933 reference "subsec:Margins"
46940 \begin_layout Section
46942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46944 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46949 \begin_inset Index idx
46952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46953 Language ! Encoding
46961 \begin_layout Standard
46962 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46963 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46964 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46966 is always encoded in utf8).
46967 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46968 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46969 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46970 -command is not known for
46971 a particular character).
46972 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46976 \begin_layout Standard
46978 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46979 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46980 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46981 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46982 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46983 's default encoding).
46984 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46985 's Unicode support covers the
46986 characters of most scripts.
46987 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46988 using one of the traditional, or
46989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46996 , encodings is necessary.
46999 \begin_layout Standard
47001 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
47003 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47006 Traditional (auto-selected)
47012 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47013 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47014 the given language(s).
47016 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47020 \begin_layout Standard
47022 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47023 If you use the option
47028 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47031 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47032 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47035 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47038 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47039 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47040 exactly one encoding.
47041 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47046 \begin_layout Standard
47048 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47049 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47055 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47056 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47060 \begin_layout Standard
47062 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47063 Finally, you can also select
47067 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47068 Note that this encoding is then used for
47073 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47074 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47080 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47083 Do not load inputenc
47085 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47086 from automatically loading the
47093 \begin_inset Index idx
47096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47098 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47100 packages ! inputenc
47108 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47109 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47110 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47111 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47112 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47114 Note that this option is only available for the standard
47120 Traditional (auto-selected)
47127 \begin_layout Standard
47129 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
47131 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
47132 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
47133 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47134 installation supports Unicode), choose
47135 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47136 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47137 is quite incomplete, so
47138 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
47143 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47144 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47145 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
47146 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47147 -commands is not used, because all
47148 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47149 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47150 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47151 , two new alternative engines
47152 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47154 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47156 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47159 \begin_inset space ~
47167 \begin_inset space ~
47175 \begin_inset space ~
47181 \begin_inset space ~
47185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47187 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47192 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47196 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
47201 \begin_layout Standard
47205 \begin_inset space ~
47210 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47211 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
47213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47221 The possible settings are:
47224 \begin_layout Description
47225 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47227 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47228 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47232 \begin_inset space ~
47236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47238 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47245 \begin_layout Description
47246 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
47247 format you will use.
47248 In many cases this will be
47253 \begin_inset Index idx
47256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47264 If the newer package
47269 \begin_inset Index idx
47272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47274 packages ! polyglossia
47279 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47280 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47281 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47283 this package will be used instead of
47290 \begin_layout Description
47292 \begin_inset space ~
47303 would be more appropriate.
47306 \begin_layout Description
47307 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47308 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47312 (for German texts), type in
47315 \begin_inset Newline newline
47320 usepackage{ngerman}
47323 \begin_layout Description
47324 None will not use a language package.
47325 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47328 \begin_layout Standard
47329 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47332 \begin_layout Description
47334 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
47336 \begin_inset space ~
47340 \begin_inset space ~
47344 \begin_inset space ~
47351 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47357 \begin_inset Index idx
47360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47362 packages ! inputenc
47368 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47369 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47370 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47376 \begin_layout Description
47377 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47379 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47380 commands, which may result in a big
47381 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47382 -commands are needed.
47384 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
47385 This is the same as the
47398 \begin_layout Description
47400 \begin_inset space ~
47404 \begin_inset space ~
47407 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47410 \begin_layout Description
47412 \begin_inset space ~
47416 \begin_inset space ~
47419 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47422 \begin_layout Description
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47427 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47430 \begin_layout Description
47432 \begin_inset space ~
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47439 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
47440 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47443 \begin_layout Description
47445 \begin_inset space ~
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47452 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
47456 \begin_layout Description
47458 \begin_inset space ~
47462 \begin_inset space ~
47465 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
47466 ISO-8859-13 encoding
47469 \begin_layout Description
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47475 \begin_inset space ~
47479 \begin_inset space ~
47482 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47483 \begin_inset space ~
47489 \begin_layout Description
47491 \begin_inset space ~
47495 \begin_inset space ~
47499 \begin_inset space ~
47502 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
47503 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
47506 \begin_layout Description
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47515 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47516 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47517 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47518 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47519 \begin_inset space ~
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47529 \begin_layout Description
47531 \begin_inset space ~
47535 \begin_inset space ~
47538 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47539 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47540 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47542 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47547 \begin_inset space ~
47553 \begin_layout Description
47555 \begin_inset space ~
47559 \begin_inset space ~
47562 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47565 \begin_layout Description
47567 \begin_inset space ~
47571 \begin_inset space ~
47574 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47577 \begin_layout Description
47579 \begin_inset space ~
47583 \begin_inset space ~
47586 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47589 \begin_layout Description
47591 \begin_inset space ~
47594 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47597 \begin_layout Description
47599 \begin_inset space ~
47602 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47605 \begin_layout Description
47607 \begin_inset space ~
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47614 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47617 \begin_layout Description
47619 \begin_inset space ~
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47629 \begin_layout Description
47631 \begin_inset space ~
47635 \begin_inset space ~
47638 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47641 \begin_layout Description
47643 \begin_inset space ~
47647 \begin_inset space ~
47653 \begin_layout Description
47655 \begin_inset space ~
47659 \begin_inset space ~
47662 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47668 \begin_inset Index idx
47671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47678 , when using this, set the document language to
47683 \begin_layout Description
47685 \begin_inset space ~
47689 \begin_inset space ~
47692 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47697 , when using this, set the document language to
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47706 \begin_layout Description
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47712 \begin_inset space ~
47715 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47721 \begin_inset Index idx
47724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47726 packages ! japanese
47731 , when using this, set the document language to
47736 \begin_layout Description
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47745 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47750 , when using this, set the document language to
47755 \begin_layout Description
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47764 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47769 , when using this, set the document language to
47774 \begin_layout Description
47776 \begin_inset space ~
47779 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47782 \begin_layout Description
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47788 \begin_inset space ~
47792 \begin_inset space ~
47795 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47798 \begin_layout Description
47800 \begin_inset space ~
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47808 \begin_inset space ~
47811 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47812 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47813 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47816 \begin_layout Description
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47822 \begin_inset space ~
47828 \begin_layout Description
47830 \begin_inset space ~
47834 \begin_inset space ~
47837 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47838 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47841 \begin_layout Description
47843 \begin_inset space ~
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47850 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47856 \begin_inset Index idx
47859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47866 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47867 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47869 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47870 with the default encoding (
47872 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47878 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47879 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47884 \begin_layout Description
47886 \begin_inset space ~
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47897 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47904 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47907 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47914 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47915 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47917 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47920 \begin_layout Description
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47929 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47935 \begin_inset Index idx
47938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47946 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47949 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47951 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47952 This used to be more comprehensive than
47955 \begin_inset space ~
47960 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47965 \begin_layout Description
47967 \begin_inset space ~
47970 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47976 \begin_inset Index idx
47979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47981 packages ! inputenc
47988 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47989 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47991 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47992 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47993 with the default encoding (
47995 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48001 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
48002 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48007 \begin_layout Description
48009 \begin_inset space ~
48013 \begin_inset space ~
48017 \begin_inset space ~
48020 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48021 \begin_inset space ~
48027 \begin_layout Description
48029 \begin_inset space ~
48033 \begin_inset space ~
48037 \begin_inset space ~
48040 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48041 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48042 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48046 \begin_layout Description
48048 \begin_inset space ~
48052 \begin_inset space ~
48056 \begin_inset space ~
48059 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48060 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48063 \begin_layout Section
48065 \begin_inset Index idx
48068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48075 \begin_inset Index idx
48078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48085 \begin_inset Index idx
48088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48089 Color ! Shaded boxes
48095 \begin_inset Index idx
48098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48099 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48107 \begin_layout Standard
48108 Here you can alter the font color for the
48112 (default: black), for
48115 \begin_inset space ~
48120 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
48124 (default: white) and for
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48137 sets the color back to the default.
48140 \begin_layout Standard
48141 Clicking any button showing
48149 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
48150 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48151 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
48152 later more quickly.
48155 \begin_layout Standard
48156 Note, if you change the
48159 \begin_inset space ~
48164 font color and use the option
48167 \begin_inset space ~
48172 in the document settings under
48175 \begin_inset space ~
48180 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48181 \begin_inset space ~
48185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48187 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48194 \begin_layout Standard
48195 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48201 \begin_layout Standard
48205 \begin_inset space ~
48214 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
48217 \begin_inset space ~
48220 Code after a forced page break:
48223 \begin_layout Itemize
48224 For the page color:
48225 \begin_inset Newline newline
48232 pagecolor{color name}
48235 \begin_layout Itemize
48236 For the text color:
48237 \begin_inset Newline newline
48247 \begin_layout Standard
48248 You are restricted to one of
48284 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48291 \begin_inset space ~
48297 \begin_inset Newline newline
48300 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
48301 names to refer to them:
48304 \begin_layout Itemize
48310 \begin_inset Newline newline
48315 page_backgroundcolor
48318 \begin_layout Itemize
48322 \begin_inset space ~
48328 \begin_inset Newline newline
48336 \begin_layout Itemize
48340 \begin_inset space ~
48346 \begin_inset Newline newline
48354 \begin_layout Itemize
48358 \begin_inset space ~
48364 \begin_inset Newline newline
48372 \begin_layout Standard
48373 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
48376 \begin_inset space ~
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48392 \begin_layout Section
48394 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
48398 \begin_layout Standard
48400 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
48401 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
48402 \begin_inset space ~
48406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48408 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48416 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
48417 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
48420 \begin_layout Standard
48422 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
48423 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
48425 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
48428 \begin_layout Section
48432 \begin_layout Standard
48433 Here you can adjust the
48437 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
48441 as described in section
48442 \begin_inset space ~
48446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48448 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48453 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
48457 \begin_layout Standard
48459 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
48460 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
48462 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
48463 this package can be used as well.
48464 The most common one are:
48467 \begin_layout Description
48469 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
48470 right Line numbers to the right margin
48473 \begin_layout Description
48475 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
48476 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
48480 \begin_layout Description
48482 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
48483 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
48486 \begin_layout Description
48488 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
48489 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
48492 \begin_layout Description
48494 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
48495 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
48498 \begin_layout Description
48500 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
48502 \begin_inset space ~
48505 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48510 \begin_layout Section
48514 \begin_layout Standard
48515 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48521 \begin_inset Index idx
48524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48526 packages ! biblatex
48536 \begin_inset Index idx
48539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 \begin_inset Index idx
48554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48565 Sectioned bibliography
48567 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48573 \begin_inset Index idx
48576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48578 packages ! bibtopic
48588 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48589 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48593 for the generation of the bibliography.
48594 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48595 \begin_inset space ~
48599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48601 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48608 \begin_layout Section
48612 \begin_layout Standard
48613 Here you can define the
48617 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48619 \begin_inset space ~
48623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48625 reference "sec:Index"
48632 \begin_layout Section
48636 \begin_layout Standard
48637 The PDF properties are explained in section
48638 \begin_inset space ~
48642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48644 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48651 \begin_layout Section
48655 \begin_layout Standard
48656 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48657 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48663 \begin_inset Index idx
48666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48678 \begin_inset Index idx
48681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48693 \begin_inset Index idx
48696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48708 \begin_inset Index idx
48711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 \begin_inset Index idx
48726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48728 packages ! mathdots
48738 \begin_inset Index idx
48741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48743 packages ! mathtools
48753 \begin_inset Index idx
48756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48768 \begin_inset Index idx
48771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48773 packages ! stackrel
48783 \begin_inset Index idx
48786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48788 packages ! stmaryrd
48798 \begin_inset Index idx
48801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48803 packages ! undertilde
48808 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48811 \begin_layout Description
48812 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48813 -errors in formulas,
48814 ensure that you have this enabled.
48817 \begin_layout Description
48818 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48819 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48820 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48824 \begin_layout Description
48825 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48828 \begin_inset space ~
48840 \begin_layout Description
48841 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48844 \begin_inset space ~
48856 \begin_layout Description
48857 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48868 \begin_layout Description
48869 mathtools is used for the math commands
48905 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48912 \begin_layout Description
48913 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48915 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48924 \begin_layout Description
48925 stackrel is used for the math command
48942 \begin_layout Description
48943 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48946 \begin_layout Description
48947 undertilde is used for the math command
48955 Accents for one Character
48964 \begin_layout Section
48966 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48968 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48974 \begin_layout Standard
48976 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48977 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48980 \begin_layout Standard
48982 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48983 The float placement options
48984 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48987 are described in the section
48990 \begin_inset space ~
48994 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48996 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
49004 \begin_inset space ~
49012 \begin_layout Section
49016 \begin_layout Standard
49017 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49019 Program Code Listings
49024 \begin_inset space ~
49032 \begin_layout Section
49036 \begin_layout Standard
49037 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49045 set to be used and set the
49050 The itemize environment is described in section
49051 \begin_inset space ~
49055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49057 reference "sec:Itemize"
49064 \begin_layout Standard
49065 You can furthermore specify a
49068 \begin_inset space ~
49073 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49074 command of the desired character.
49075 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49082 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49088 \begin_inset space \space{}
49092 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49102 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49103 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49106 \begin_layout Standard
49107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49115 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49116 -packages in the preamble (menu
49119 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49120 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49123 \begin_inset space ~
49129 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49133 usepackage{textcomp}
49136 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49140 usepackage{amssymb}
49150 \begin_layout Section
49154 \begin_layout Standard
49155 Branches are described in section
49156 \begin_inset space ~
49160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49162 reference "sec:Branches"
49169 \begin_layout Section
49171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49173 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49180 \begin_layout Standard
49181 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49184 \begin_layout Description
49186 \begin_inset space ~
49190 \begin_inset space ~
49193 Format: The format that is used when you enter
49194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49213 View Master Document
49214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49221 Update Master Document
49222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49229 menu or the toolbar.
49230 The default is set in
49232 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49233 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49235 \begin_inset space ~
49238 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49242 \begin_inset space ~
49246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49248 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49255 \begin_layout Description
49257 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
49259 \begin_inset space ~
49263 \begin_inset space ~
49267 \begin_inset space ~
49270 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
49275 option which is needed with some packages.
49276 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
49277 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
49280 \begin_layout Description
49282 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
49284 \begin_inset space ~
49288 \begin_inset space ~
49291 Options offers settings for the
49299 \begin_layout Itemize
49303 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
49305 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
49307 \begin_inset space ~
49313 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
49315 \begin_inset space ~
49319 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
49325 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
49327 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
49328 settings for the menu
49330 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49334 \begin_inset space ~
49338 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
49341 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
49342 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
49347 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49349 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
49351 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
49354 or a detailed description see section
49356 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49361 \begin_inset space ~
49367 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
49371 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
49375 \begin_layout Itemize
49377 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
49380 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
49382 determines whether so-called
49383 \begin_inset Quotes els
49387 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49391 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
49393 \begin_inset Quotes els
49397 \begin_inset Quotes ers
49400 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
49401 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
49402 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
49404 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
49406 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
49407 macros, you can uncheck this.
49408 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
49415 \begin_layout Description
49417 \begin_inset space ~
49421 \begin_inset space ~
49424 Options offers settings for the export format
49432 \begin_inset space ~
49437 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49438 \begin_inset space ~
49441 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49445 \begin_inset space ~
49450 settings are described in detail in section
49452 Math Output in XHTML
49457 \begin_inset space ~
49466 \begin_inset space ~
49470 \begin_inset space ~
49475 is used for the size of equations in the output.
49478 \begin_layout Description
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49485 Save transient properties
49487 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
49488 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
49489 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
49493 \begin_layout Itemize
49494 the activation of change tracking
49497 \begin_layout Itemize
49498 the output of tracked changes
49501 \begin_layout Itemize
49502 the recording of the document directory path.
49505 \begin_layout Standard
49506 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
49507 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49511 \begin_layout Section
49519 \begin_layout Standard
49520 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49522 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49524 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49526 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49530 \begin_layout Standard
49531 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49532 -syntax is given in section
49533 \begin_inset space ~
49537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49539 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49546 \begin_layout Chapter
49552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49554 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49559 \begin_inset Index idx
49562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49571 \begin_layout Standard
49572 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49574 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49578 It has the following submenus.
49581 \begin_layout Section
49585 \begin_layout Subsection
49589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49590 User Interface File
49591 \begin_inset Index idx
49594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49595 Customization ! of toolbars
49601 \begin_inset Index idx
49604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49605 Customization ! of menus
49613 \begin_layout Standard
49614 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49615 interface (ui) file.
49616 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49624 \begin_layout Description
49629 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49632 \begin_layout Description
49639 the menu entries in popup context menus
49642 \begin_layout Description
49647 specifies the toolbar buttons
49650 \begin_layout Standard
49651 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49652 and edit the entries.
49655 \begin_layout Standard
49656 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49668 entries must be finished with an explicit
49693 and in the case of the
49694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49706 The syntax for the entries is:
49709 \begin_layout Standard
49710 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49739 \begin_layout Standard
49741 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49744 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49745 -functions are listed in the menu
49747 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49749 \begin_inset space ~
49757 \begin_layout Standard
49758 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49764 \begin_layout Standard
49765 For example, assuming you use the menu
49767 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49770 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49774 \begin_layout Standard
49775 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49799 \begin_layout Standard
49801 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49816 to have the sixth bookmark.
49819 \begin_layout Standard
49823 \begin_inset space ~
49828 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49829 's toolbar buttons.
49830 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49831 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49834 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49846 \begin_layout Standard
49849 Enable tool tips in main work area
49851 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49855 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49859 \begin_layout Standard
49864 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49865 should display in the menu
49867 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49869 \begin_inset space ~
49877 \begin_layout Subsection
49881 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49885 \begin_layout Standard
49888 Restore window layouts and geometries
49891 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49892 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49896 \begin_layout Standard
49899 Restore cursor positions
49901 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49905 \begin_layout Standard
49908 Load opened files from last session
49910 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49914 \begin_layout Standard
49917 Clear all session information
49919 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49920 sessions (cursor positions, names
49921 of last opened documents, etc.).
49924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49928 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49933 \begin_inset Index idx
49936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49945 \begin_layout Standard
49948 Backup original documents when saving
49950 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49951 it was saved the last time.
49952 It is stored in the
49955 \begin_inset space ~
49961 \begin_inset space ~
49965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49967 reference "sec:Paths"
49971 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49974 \begin_inset space ~
49980 The backup file has the file extension
49981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49995 \begin_layout Standard
49998 Backup documents, every
50000 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50003 \begin_layout Standard
50006 Save documents compressed by default
50008 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50009 \begin_inset space ~
50013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50015 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50020 This applies to newly created documents only.
50021 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50025 Windows & work area
50028 \begin_layout Standard
50031 Open documents in tabs
50033 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50037 \begin_layout Standard
50042 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50049 \begin_inset space ~
50053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50055 reference "sec:Paths"
50059 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50066 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50067 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50068 of \SpecialChar LyX
50070 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50071 instance is created for each file.
50074 \begin_layout Standard
50077 Single close-tab button
50079 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50089 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50090 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50091 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50095 \begin_layout Standard
50096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50104 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50105 before the change takes effect.
50113 \begin_layout Standard
50118 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
50120 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50122 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50126 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
50127 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50128 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50131 \begin_layout Subsection
50133 \begin_inset Index idx
50136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50145 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50152 \begin_layout Standard
50153 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50157 \begin_layout Standard
50158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50166 This section only deals with the fonts
50170 the \SpecialChar LyX
50172 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
50175 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50176 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50187 \begin_layout Standard
50188 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
50205 (depends on the system) as its
50208 \begin_inset space ~
50224 \begin_layout Standard
50225 You can change the font size with the
50232 \begin_layout Standard
50237 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50242 points have the size of 1
50243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50247 \begin_inset space ~
50251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50253 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50258 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50263 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50264 \begin_inset space ~
50268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50270 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50277 \begin_layout Subsection
50279 \begin_inset Index idx
50282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50283 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
50290 \begin_inset Index idx
50293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 \begin_layout Standard
50303 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50304 by choosing an item in the
50305 list and selecting the
50312 \begin_layout Standard
50313 By checking the option
50317 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50320 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
50321 \begin_inset space ~
50325 \begin_inset space ~
50330 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50333 \begin_layout Subsection
50335 \begin_inset Index idx
50338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50347 \begin_layout Standard
50348 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
50352 \begin_layout Standard
50357 enables previewing snippets of your document.
50358 This feature is described in section
50359 \begin_inset space ~
50363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50365 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50372 \begin_layout Standard
50373 Checking the option
50376 \begin_inset space ~
50380 \begin_inset space ~
50384 \begin_inset space ~
50389 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
50392 \begin_layout Section
50394 \begin_inset Index idx
50397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50406 \begin_layout Subsection
50410 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50414 \begin_layout Standard
50417 Cursor follows scrollbar
50419 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
50423 \begin_layout Standard
50424 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
50425 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
50426 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
50429 \begin_layout Standard
50432 Scroll below end of document
50434 is self-explanatory.
50437 \begin_layout Standard
50438 In \SpecialChar LyX
50439 one can jump from word to word by pressing
50446 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
50448 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
50449 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
50450 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
50454 \begin_layout Standard
50456 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
50459 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
50461 is only relevant in documents that
50466 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
50475 markup) with this option selected.
50476 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
50478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50482 \begin_inset Quotes els
50486 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50490 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
50491 dissolving from insets.
50496 track changes, pasted text is
50501 \begin_inset Quotes els
50505 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50508 notwithstanding the state of this option.
50513 \begin_layout Standard
50516 Sort environments alphabetically
50518 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50521 \begin_layout Standard
50524 Group environments by their category
50526 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
50529 \begin_layout Standard
50534 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
50543 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50547 \begin_layout Standard
50549 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50552 Search drive for cited files
50554 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50555 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50558 \begin_inset space ~
50562 \begin_inset space ~
50566 \begin_inset space ~
50570 \begin_inset space ~
50573 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50576 context menu on a citation.
50581 field determines the search pattern.
50583 \begin_inset space ~
50587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50589 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50598 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50602 \begin_layout Standard
50603 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50608 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50609 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50613 \begin_layout Subsection
50615 \begin_inset Index idx
50618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50625 \begin_inset Index idx
50628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50629 Settings ! Shortcuts
50637 \begin_layout Standard
50642 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50644 Several binding files are available, among them:
50647 \begin_layout Description
50648 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50651 \begin_layout Description
50652 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50664 \begin_layout Description
50665 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50676 \begin_layout Standard
50677 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50682 , and binding files for special languages.
50683 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50688 \begin_inset space \space{}
50692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50700 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50701 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50702 will try to use the appropriate binding
50706 \begin_layout Standard
50707 Some binding files, like
50711 , only have a limited scope.
50712 When looking at the end of the file
50716 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50719 \begin_layout Standard
50723 \begin_inset space ~
50727 \begin_inset space ~
50732 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50733 in the selected key binding file.
50736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50740 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50745 \begin_inset Index idx
50748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50749 Key Bindings ! Editing
50757 \begin_layout Standard
50758 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50759 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50760 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50761 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50764 Show key-bindings containing
50767 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50768 Insert there for example as keyword
50769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50776 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50777 functions that contain
50778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50786 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50787 All \SpecialChar LyX
50788 functions are also listed in the file
50793 that you will find in the
50800 \begin_layout Standard
50801 For example, to add the shortcut
50809 , select the function and press the
50814 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50815 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50818 \begin_layout Standard
50819 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50820 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50825 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50827 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50832 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50835 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50839 \begin_layout Standard
50840 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50843 \begin_layout Standard
50844 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50846 The syntax of the entries is:
50849 \begin_layout Standard
50855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50874 \begin_layout Standard
50875 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50876 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50904 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50905 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50906 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50907 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50909 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50913 , you needed to specify it as
50918 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50921 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50924 \begin_layout Subsection
50926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50928 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50933 \begin_inset Index idx
50936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50943 \begin_inset Index idx
50946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50947 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50955 \begin_layout Standard
50956 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50957 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50958 provides keyboard maps.
50959 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50960 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50963 \begin_inset space ~
50967 \begin_inset space ~
50972 and select the keyboard map file named
50979 \begin_layout Standard
50988 keyboard map and, if you use the
50992 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50995 arg "keymap-primary"
51001 arg "keymap-secondary"
51004 respectively or toggle between them with
51007 arg "keymap-toggle"
51013 \begin_layout Standard
51014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51022 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51031 \begin_layout Standard
51032 You can also specify the mouse
51034 Wheel scrolling speed
51037 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51041 Middle mouse button pasting
51043 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51044 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51047 \begin_layout Standard
51055 \begin_inset space ~
51059 \begin_inset space ~
51064 you can select a key for zooming.
51065 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51068 \begin_layout Subsection
51072 \begin_layout Standard
51073 Input completion is described in section
51074 \begin_inset space ~
51078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51080 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51087 \begin_layout Section
51089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51096 \begin_inset Index idx
51099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51106 \begin_inset Index idx
51109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51118 \begin_layout Standard
51119 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51120 are normally determined during
51122 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51125 \begin_layout Description
51127 \begin_inset space ~
51130 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51131 's working directory.
51132 It is the default when you
51143 \begin_inset space ~
51151 \begin_layout Description
51153 \begin_inset space ~
51156 templates This directory
51157 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
51158 contains the templates that are shown
51159 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
51160 will be opened when you use the menu
51161 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
51166 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51168 \begin_inset space ~
51172 \begin_inset space ~
51180 \begin_layout Description
51182 \begin_inset space ~
51185 files This directory
51186 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
51187 will be opened when you use the
51188 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
51189 contains the example files that are listed in
51192 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
51201 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51203 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
51205 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
51211 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
51213 \begin_inset Newline newline
51217 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51229 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51230 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51240 \begin_layout Description
51242 \begin_inset space ~
51246 \begin_inset Index idx
51249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51255 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51256 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51257 \begin_inset space ~
51261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51263 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51271 will be used to save the backups.
51272 \begin_inset Newline newline
51275 Backup files have the ending
51276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51286 \begin_layout Description
51288 \begin_inset space ~
51291 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51292 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51294 \begin_inset Newline newline
51301 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51307 You can edit this file with the program
51316 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51317 in its preferences under
51320 \begin_inset space ~
51326 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
51331 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51333 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
51334 in your \SpecialChar LyX
51340 and \SpecialChar LyX
51341 need to be running the same time.
51342 \begin_inset Newline newline
51345 The pipe is also used for the
51349 feature, see section
51350 \begin_inset space ~
51354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51356 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51361 \begin_inset Newline newline
51364 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
51365 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
51366 \begin_inset Newline newline
51382 \begin_layout Description
51384 \begin_inset space ~
51387 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
51390 \begin_layout Description
51392 \begin_inset space ~
51395 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
51396 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
51397 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
51400 \begin_layout Description
51402 \begin_inset space ~
51405 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
51411 You only need to specify it if you are using
51415 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
51417 For \SpecialChar LyX
51422 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
51426 \begin_layout Description
51428 \begin_inset space ~
51431 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
51432 When \SpecialChar LyX
51433 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
51434 to find it on the system.
51435 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
51437 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
51439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51446 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
51447 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
51450 \begin_layout Description
51452 \begin_inset space ~
51455 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
51456 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
51457 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
51458 code or in the document
51460 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
51462 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
51463 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
51464 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
51465 scanned for the input files.
51466 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
51467 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
51469 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
51470 compilation may fail for some documents.
51473 \begin_layout Section
51477 \begin_layout Standard
51478 Here you can insert your
51487 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
51489 \begin_inset space ~
51493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51495 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
51499 , to mark changes you make as yours.
51502 \begin_layout Section
51504 \begin_inset Index idx
51507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51508 Language ! Settings
51514 \begin_inset Index idx
51517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51518 Settings ! Language
51526 \begin_layout Subsection
51528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51530 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
51537 \begin_layout Description
51539 \begin_inset space ~
51543 \begin_inset space ~
51546 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51548 You can find its actual translation status here:
51549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51551 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51557 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51561 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51563 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51564 LaTeX Language Support
51569 \begin_layout Description
51571 \begin_inset space ~
51574 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51575 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51576 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51577 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51594 The most widespread language package is
51599 \begin_inset Index idx
51602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51609 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51611 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51612 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51613 come with the alternative
51619 \begin_inset Index idx
51622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51624 packages ! polyglossia
51629 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51630 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51636 The available selections are described in section
51637 \begin_inset space ~
51641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51643 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51650 \begin_layout Description
51652 \begin_inset space ~
51656 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51657 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51658 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51660 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51664 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51668 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51670 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51674 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51675 that is used to switch to a different language
51676 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51677 to start the package
51681 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51682 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51686 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51687 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51690 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51694 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51702 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51710 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51713 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51715 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51719 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51737 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51738 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51745 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51746 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51751 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51756 , this setting is ignored.
51761 \begin_layout Description
51763 \begin_inset space ~
51767 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51774 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51775 Use this if the language switch set in
51779 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51783 's alternative command
51787 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51788 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51791 end{otherlanguage*}
51795 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51796 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51797 command toggles the package on and off
51798 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51799 Empty by default, as
51803 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51805 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51810 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51816 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51821 , this setting is ignored.
51826 \begin_layout Description
51828 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51830 \begin_inset space ~
51834 \begin_inset space ~
51837 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51841 \begin_layout Description
51843 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51845 \begin_inset space ~
51849 \begin_inset space ~
51852 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51858 \begin_layout Description
51860 \begin_inset space ~
51864 \begin_inset space ~
51868 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51870 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51873 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51874 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51877 to the document class options
51878 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51879 rather than the language package options.
51880 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51884 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51885 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51887 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51888 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51890 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51895 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51896 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51905 \begin_layout Description
51907 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51909 \begin_inset space ~
51913 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51915 \begin_inset space ~
51919 \begin_inset space ~
51923 \begin_inset space ~
51929 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51931 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51934 this option is set,
51935 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51936 the language switch defined in
51939 \begin_inset space ~
51944 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51945 to the document language.
51946 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51947 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51950 \begin_inset space ~
51955 or if a package resets the document language.
51956 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51957 usually should be the document language).
51958 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51959 documents start with the chosen document language.
51960 When this option is not set, the
51963 \begin_inset space ~
51968 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51970 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51973 \begin_inset space ~
51983 \begin_layout Description
51985 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51987 \begin_inset space ~
51991 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51993 \begin_inset space ~
51997 \begin_inset space ~
52001 \begin_inset space ~
52007 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52011 \begin_inset space ~
52015 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52016 Set document language explicitly
52022 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52024 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52030 \begin_inset space ~
52036 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52038 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52042 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52044 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52047 the end of the document.
52048 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52052 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52053 \paragraph_spacing single
52055 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52061 \begin_layout Description
52063 \begin_inset space ~
52067 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52069 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52073 \begin_inset space ~
52077 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52079 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52081 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52085 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52088 in a language different
52089 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52091 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52094 the document language will be
52095 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52096 marked (by default with a blue
52099 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
52101 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
52105 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
52109 \begin_layout Description
52111 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
52113 \begin_inset space ~
52117 \begin_inset space ~
52121 \begin_inset space ~
52124 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
52125 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
52126 switched via the operating system.
52127 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
52129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52132 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
52133 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
52138 \begin_layout Description
52140 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
52142 \begin_inset space ~
52146 \begin_inset space ~
52149 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
52150 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
52155 \begin_layout Description
52157 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52159 \begin_inset space ~
52163 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
52165 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
52169 \begin_inset space ~
52173 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
52174 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
52175 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
52177 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
52181 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
52183 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
52184 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
52186 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52187 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
52188 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
52190 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
52195 \begin_layout Standard
52200 means that the cursor
52201 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
52202 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
52203 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
52205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52208 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
52209 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
52213 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
52215 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
52216 specific case always means: move
52220 in text (even if this means:
52226 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52227 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
52228 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
52229 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
52230 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
52231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52242 \begin_layout Standard
52244 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
52249 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
52250 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
52251 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
52255 ) when coming from the left.
52256 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
52258 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
52259 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52260 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
52265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52267 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
52271 \begin_layout Description
52273 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
52275 \begin_inset space ~
52279 \begin_inset space ~
52282 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
52283 separator alignment).
52284 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
52286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52289 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
52290 (static) custom character here.
52293 \begin_layout Description
52295 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
52297 \begin_inset space ~
52301 \begin_inset space ~
52304 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52310 \begin_layout Subsection
52314 \begin_layout Standard
52315 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
52316 \begin_inset space ~
52320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52322 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52329 \begin_layout Section
52333 \begin_layout Subsection
52335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52337 name "subsec:General-output"
52344 \begin_layout Description
52346 \begin_inset space ~
52349 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52351 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52353 \begin_inset space ~
52359 For a detailed description see section
52361 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52366 \begin_inset space ~
52374 \begin_layout Description
52376 \begin_inset space ~
52379 Options Options for the program
52383 that is used for the export format
52388 \begin_inset space ~
52392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52394 reference "subsec:Export"
52399 Possible options are listed in the
52404 \begin_inset Newline newline
52408 \begin_inset Flex URL
52411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52413 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52423 \begin_layout Description
52425 \begin_inset space ~
52429 \begin_inset space ~
52432 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
52435 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52436 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52438 \begin_inset space ~
52444 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52447 \begin_layout Description
52449 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
52451 \begin_inset space ~
52455 \begin_inset Index idx
52458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52465 \begin_inset Index idx
52468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52469 Settings ! Date format
52474 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52475 \begin_inset Newline newline
52479 \begin_inset Flex URL
52482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52484 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52490 \begin_inset Newline newline
52493 For example the format
52494 \begin_inset Newline newline
52498 \begin_inset Newline newline
52501 prints the date as day/month/year.
52506 \begin_layout Description
52508 \begin_inset space ~
52512 \begin_inset space ~
52515 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52516 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52519 \begin_layout Subsection
52525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52527 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52532 \begin_inset Index idx
52535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52536 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
52545 \begin_layout Description
52547 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52549 \begin_inset space ~
52557 \begin_inset space ~
52561 \begin_inset space ~
52564 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52569 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52590 are used for Cyrillic.
52591 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52604 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52606 sets up in the background.
52607 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52612 \begin_layout Description
52614 \begin_inset space ~
52618 \begin_inset space ~
52622 \begin_inset space ~
52626 \begin_inset space ~
52629 options They only have an effect when the program
52633 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52636 \begin_layout Standard
52637 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52638 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52639 manuals of the applications.
52642 \begin_layout Description
52644 \begin_inset space ~
52647 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52648 \begin_inset space ~
52652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52654 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52661 \begin_layout Description
52663 \begin_inset space ~
52666 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52667 \begin_inset space ~
52671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52673 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52680 \begin_layout Description
52682 \begin_inset space ~
52685 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52686 \begin_inset space ~
52690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52692 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52699 \begin_layout Description
52705 \begin_inset space ~
52708 command Command for the program
52710 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52713 that is described in the section
52715 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52720 Additional Features
52725 \begin_layout Standard
52726 There are additionally the following options:
52729 \begin_layout Description
52731 \begin_inset space ~
52735 \begin_inset space ~
52739 \begin_inset space ~
52743 \begin_inset space ~
52748 \begin_inset space ~
52751 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52769 to separate folders.
52770 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52772 \begin_inset Index idx
52775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52782 \begin_inset Index idx
52785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52794 \begin_layout Description
52796 \begin_inset space ~
52800 \begin_inset space ~
52804 \begin_inset space ~
52808 \begin_inset space ~
52812 \begin_inset space ~
52816 \begin_inset space ~
52819 changes Removes all manually set
52825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52826 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52828 \begin_inset space ~
52833 dialog when changing the document class.
52836 \begin_layout Section
52838 \begin_inset space ~
52842 \begin_inset Index idx
52845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52854 \begin_layout Subsection
52856 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52858 name "subsec:Converters"
52863 \begin_inset Index idx
52866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52875 \begin_layout Standard
52876 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52877 from one format to another.
52878 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52879 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52886 \begin_inset space ~
52891 field and press the
52896 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52900 \begin_inset space ~
52905 drop-down list, modify the
52909 field and press the
52916 \begin_layout Standard
52919 Converter File Cache
52925 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52927 Maximum Age (in days
52930 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52931 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52934 \begin_layout Standard
52935 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52936 definition, is described in the section
52947 \begin_layout Subsection
52949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52951 name "sec:File-Formats"
52956 \begin_inset Index idx
52959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52966 \begin_inset Index idx
52969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52978 \begin_layout Standard
52979 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52989 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52992 \begin_layout Standard
52993 You can also define the
52995 Default output format
52997 that is used when you use
52999 View, Update, View Master Document
53003 Update Master Document
53009 menu or the toolbar.
53012 \begin_layout Standard
53013 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53024 \begin_layout Standard
53025 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53027 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53028 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53029 This is done by specifying a
53034 More about this is described in the section
53045 \begin_layout Chapter
53046 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53048 \begin_inset Index idx
53051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53058 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53060 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53067 \begin_layout Standard
53069 \begin_inset space ~
53073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53075 reference "tab:Units"
53079 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53080 and used in this documentation.
53083 \begin_layout Standard
53084 \begin_inset Float table
53091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53092 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53110 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53118 \begin_inset Tabular
53119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
53120 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
53121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53122 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
53123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53272 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53276 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
53280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53547 scaled point (65536
53548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53615 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53739 % of original image width
53744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53828 \begin_layout Standard
53829 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53832 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53839 \begin_layout Bibliography
53840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53841 LatexCommand bibitem
53848 The \SpecialChar LyX
53850 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53853 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53859 \begin_inset Newline newline
53863 \begin_inset Flex URL
53866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53868 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53876 \begin_layout Bibliography
53877 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53878 LatexCommand bibitem
53879 key "latexcompanion"
53884 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53886 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53887 Companion Second Edition.
53890 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53893 \begin_layout Bibliography
53894 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53895 LatexCommand bibitem
53901 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53904 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53908 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53911 \begin_layout Bibliography
53912 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53913 LatexCommand bibitem
53922 : A Document Preparation System.
53925 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53928 \begin_layout Bibliography
53929 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53930 LatexCommand bibitem
53940 The \SpecialChar TeX
53944 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53947 \begin_layout Bibliography
53948 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53949 LatexCommand bibitem
53955 The \SpecialChar TeX
53957 \begin_inset Newline newline
53961 \begin_inset Flex URL
53964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53966 https://ctan.org/topic
53974 \begin_layout Bibliography
53975 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53976 LatexCommand bibitem
53982 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53984 \begin_inset Newline newline
53988 \begin_inset Flex URL
53991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53993 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54001 \begin_layout Bibliography
54002 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54003 LatexCommand bibitem
54010 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54012 name "Documentation"
54013 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54020 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54024 \begin_inset Newline newline
54028 \begin_inset Flex URL
54031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54033 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54041 \begin_layout Bibliography
54042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54043 LatexCommand bibitem
54050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54052 name "Documentation"
54053 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54058 how to use the program
54060 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54064 \begin_inset Newline newline
54068 \begin_inset Flex URL
54071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54073 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54081 \begin_layout Bibliography
54082 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54083 LatexCommand bibitem
54090 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54092 name "Documentation"
54093 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54098 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54104 \begin_inset Index idx
54107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54109 packages ! biblatex
54115 \begin_inset Newline newline
54119 \begin_inset Flex URL
54122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54124 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
54132 \begin_layout Bibliography
54133 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54134 LatexCommand bibitem
54141 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54143 name "Documentation"
54144 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
54149 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54155 \begin_inset Index idx
54158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54166 \begin_inset Newline newline
54170 \begin_inset Flex URL
54173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54175 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
54183 \begin_layout Bibliography
54184 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54185 LatexCommand bibitem
54192 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54194 name "Documentation"
54195 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
54205 \begin_inset Newline newline
54209 \begin_inset Flex URL
54212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54214 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54222 \begin_layout Bibliography
54223 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54224 LatexCommand bibitem
54225 key "makeindex-man"
54231 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54234 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54244 \begin_inset Newline newline
54248 \begin_inset Flex URL
54251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54253 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54261 \begin_layout Bibliography
54262 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54263 LatexCommand bibitem
54270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54272 name "Documentation"
54273 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54283 \begin_inset Newline newline
54287 \begin_inset Flex URL
54290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54292 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54300 \begin_layout Bibliography
54301 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54302 LatexCommand bibitem
54309 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54311 name "Documentation"
54312 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54317 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54319 \begin_inset Newline newline
54323 \begin_inset Flex URL
54326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54328 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54336 \begin_layout Bibliography
54337 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54338 LatexCommand bibitem
54345 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54347 name "Documentation"
54348 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54353 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54359 \begin_inset Index idx
54362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54370 \begin_inset Newline newline
54374 \begin_inset Flex URL
54377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54379 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54387 \begin_layout Bibliography
54388 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54389 LatexCommand bibitem
54396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54398 name "Documentation"
54399 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54404 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54410 \begin_inset Index idx
54413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54415 packages ! enumitem
54421 \begin_inset Newline newline
54425 \begin_inset Flex URL
54428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54430 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54438 \begin_layout Bibliography
54439 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54440 LatexCommand bibitem
54447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54449 name "Documentation"
54450 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54455 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54461 \begin_inset Index idx
54464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54466 packages ! fancyhdr
54472 \begin_inset Newline newline
54476 \begin_inset Flex URL
54479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54481 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54489 \begin_layout Bibliography
54490 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54491 LatexCommand bibitem
54498 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54500 name "Documentation"
54501 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54506 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54512 \begin_inset Index idx
54515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54517 packages ! hyperref
54523 \begin_inset Newline newline
54527 \begin_inset Flex URL
54530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54532 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54540 \begin_layout Bibliography
54541 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54542 LatexCommand bibitem
54549 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54551 name "Documentation"
54552 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54557 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54563 \begin_inset Index idx
54566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54568 packages ! microtype
54574 \begin_inset Newline newline
54578 \begin_inset Flex URL
54581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54583 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54591 \begin_layout Bibliography
54592 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54593 LatexCommand bibitem
54600 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54602 name "Documentation"
54603 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54608 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54614 \begin_inset Index idx
54617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54625 \begin_inset Newline newline
54629 \begin_inset Flex URL
54632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54634 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54642 \begin_layout Bibliography
54643 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54644 LatexCommand bibitem
54651 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54653 name "Documentation"
54654 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54659 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54665 \begin_inset Index idx
54668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54670 packages ! prettyref
54676 \begin_inset Newline newline
54680 \begin_inset Flex URL
54683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54685 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54693 \begin_layout Bibliography
54694 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54695 LatexCommand bibitem
54702 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54704 name "Documentation"
54705 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54710 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54716 \begin_inset Index idx
54719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54721 packages ! refstyle
54727 \begin_inset Newline newline
54731 \begin_inset Flex URL
54734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54736 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54744 \begin_layout Bibliography
54745 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54746 LatexCommand bibitem
54753 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54756 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54761 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54763 \begin_inset Newline newline
54767 \begin_inset Flex URL
54770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54772 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54780 \begin_layout Bibliography
54781 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54782 LatexCommand bibitem
54789 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54792 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54797 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54799 \begin_inset Newline newline
54803 \begin_inset Flex URL
54806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54808 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54816 \begin_layout Bibliography
54817 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54818 LatexCommand bibitem
54825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54828 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54833 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54834 for Cyrillic languages:
54835 \begin_inset Newline newline
54839 \begin_inset Flex URL
54842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54844 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54852 \begin_layout Bibliography
54853 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54854 LatexCommand bibitem
54861 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54864 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54869 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54871 \begin_inset Newline newline
54875 \begin_inset Flex URL
54878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54880 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54888 \begin_layout Bibliography
54889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54890 LatexCommand bibitem
54897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54900 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54905 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54907 \begin_inset Newline newline
54911 \begin_inset Flex URL
54914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54916 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54924 \begin_layout Bibliography
54925 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54926 LatexCommand bibitem
54933 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54936 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54941 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54943 \begin_inset Newline newline
54947 \begin_inset Flex URL
54950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54952 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54960 \begin_layout Standard
54961 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54995 \begin_inset Note Note
54998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55005 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55006 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55007 bibliography is the second one:
55015 \begin_layout Standard
55016 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55017 LatexCommand bibtex
55018 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55019 options "biblio/alphadin"
55026 \begin_layout Standard
55027 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55031 \begin_layout Standard
55035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55041 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55050 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55058 \begin_inset Note Note
55061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55062 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55063 \begin_inset space ~
55067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55069 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55081 \begin_layout Standard
55082 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55083 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55089 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55090 LatexCommand printindex